Chevrolet 2001 Silverado 1500 Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2001-Chevrolet-Silverado-1500-Owners-Manual-813562 chevrolet-2001-chevrolet-silverado-1500-owners-manual-813562 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 468 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1-800-CHEV-USA
(
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call
1-800-268-6800
)
that provides in an emergency:
Free
lockout assistance
Free
dead-battery assistance
Free
out-of-fuel assistance
Free
flat-tire change
Emergency
towing
Courtesy
Transportation
Every
2001
Silverado under
warranty is backed
with the following
services:
®
1-800-CHEV-USA
(
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call
1-800-268-6800
)
i
2001 Chevrolet Silverado
Owner's Manual
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number C2115 A First Edition © Copyright General Motors Corporation 2000
All Rights Reserved
ii
Table of Contents
Windows
Keys and Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Tailgate
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Four-Wheel Drive Operation (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers
Cruise Control
Exterior and Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Accessory Power Outlets
OnStar® System (Option)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Message Center
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts Air Bag System
Restraint Systems for Children
Section
1
Section
2
Seats and Restraint Systems
Features and Controls
iii
Section
3
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section
4
Your Driving and the Road
Section
5
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Off-Road Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck
Problems on the Road
iv
Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
GM Oil Life System™ (If Equipped)
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
Brakes
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Maintenance Schedule
Service and Appearance Care
Section
7
Section
6
Scheduled Maintenance
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records
v
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Section
8
Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications
Index
Section
9
Please refer to the last page of this manual for your
Service Station Guide
vi
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name SILVERADO are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so the new owner can use it.
We support voluntary
technician certification.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
vii
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
viii
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
ix
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are important for
you and your
passengers
whenever your
vehicle is driven:
CHILD
RESTRAINT
TOP STRAP
ANCHOR
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
POWER
WINDOW
AIR BAG
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
TURN
SIGNALS
PARKING
LAMPS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
FOG LAMPS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
BRAKE
COOLANT
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
LIGHTER
HORN
FUEL
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
x
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Regular Cab Pickup
Extended Cab Pickup
Chassis Cab
Crew Cab
For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood
See Section 6*
Service Station Guide
Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6*
Engine Oil Dipstick
See Section 6*
Cooling System
See Section 5*
Hood Release
See Section 6
Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6
Tire Pressure
See Section 6
Spare Tire Pressure
See Section 5
Battery
See Section 6
Fuel
See Section 6*
*For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, see the Diesel Engine Supplement
1- 1-1
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2 Seats and Seat Controls
1-12 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
1-17 Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
1-18 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
1-18 Driver Position
1-24 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
1-25 Right Front Passenger Position
1-25 Air Bag System
1-35 Center Passenger Position
1-36 Rear Seat Passengers
1-40 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
1-42 Children
1-46 Restraint Systems for Children
1-67 Older Children
1-70 Safety Belt Extender
1-70 Checking Your Restraint Systems
1-70 Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-2
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down. It also tells you about
reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.
Manual Front Seat
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket or split bench seat,
you can adjust it with this lever located at the front of
the seat.
Lift the lever at the front of the seat to unlock it.
Using your body, slide the seat to where you want it.
Then, release the lever and try to move the seat with
your body in order to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-3
Manual Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has a
lumbar adjustment, you
can increase or decrease
lumbar support in an area
of the lower seatback. It is
located on the outboard side
of the seat cushion.
To increase or decrease support, turn the knob toward
the front or rear of the vehicle.
Power Seat(s) (If Equipped)
Horizontal Control: If your vehicle has a power seat,
you can adjust it with this control located on the
outboard edge of the seat.
Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or
lowering the forward edge of the button. Raise or
lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the
rear edge of the button.
1-4
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole
button toward the front or toward the rear of the vehicle.
Moving the whole button up or down raises or lowers
the entire seat cushion.
Vertical Control: If your vehicle has power reclining
seats, you can use this button to adjust the angle of the
seatback. Move the reclining front seatback rearward or
forward by moving the button toward the rear or toward
the front of the vehicle. See “Reclining Seatbacks” in
the Index for further information.
Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If you have power
lumbar adjustment, you
can increase or decrease
lumbar support in an area
of the lower seatback.
The control is located on
the on outboard of the
cushion seat.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.
To decrease support, press and hold the rear of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the back wing area of the
lower seatback.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.
To decrease support, press and hold the bottom of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.
1-5
Memory Seat (If Equipped)
The memory function
controls the driver’s seat
cushion and recliner
positions. The control is
located on the driver’s
side door panel.
It does not store the lumbar or back support positions.
To set your memory seat:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to your desired position.
2. Press the SET button and then press the 1 or 2
side of the memory control within five seconds.
When your vehicle is in PARK (P), press the 1 or 2
button of the memory control to recall the seat setting.
To do the same thing for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other number of the
memory control.
Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has heated
front seats, the ignition
must be in RUN for them
to operate.
The control for the driver’s side heated seat is located
on the driver’s side door panel. The control for the
passenger’s side heated seat is located on the
passenger’s side door panel.
To activate the heated seats, press the button once for
the HI heat setting. Press the button again for the
LO heat setting. To turn off the heated seats, press the
button a third time. An indicator light on the button will
illuminate for each heat setting anytime the heated seats
are operating.
1-6
Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the front seatback, lift the lever upward.
The lever is located on the outboard side of the seat
cushion. Release the lever to lock the seatback where
you want it. Lift the lever again upward and the seatback
will go to an upright position.
If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner,
see “Power Seats” in the Index for further information
on how to operate the reclining seatback feature.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-7
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-8
On some models, the head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
To tilt the head restraints forward, grasp the top of the
restraint and move it forward to where you want it to go
until you hear a click. It will then be locked into that
position until you need to move it again. Pulling it
forward past the last position will allow the restraint to
return to its upright position.
Seatback Latches
CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward
in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to the person sitting there. Always press rearward
on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
The seatbacks fold forward to let you access the rear
of the cab.
To fold a front seatback
forward, pull this lever
toward the front of the
vehicle to release the
seatback. The lever is
located on the outboard
side of the seat cushion.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the
seatback to its upright position, try to pull the seatback
forward to make sure it is locked.
1-9
Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab Only)
(If Equipped)
CAUTION:
If any easy entry seat isn’t locked, it can move.
In a sudden stop or crash, the person sitting there
could be injured. And, even if there is no crash or
sudden stop, a driver sitting in an unlocked easy
entry seat could be startled by the sudden
movement and hit the wrong control or pedal,
causing an accident. After you’ve used it, be sure
to push rearward on any easy entry seat to be
sure it is locked.
The driver’s side manual front bucket seat and the
driver’s side manual split bench seat in your vehicle
may have an easy entry feature. This makes it easy
to get in and out of the rear seat.
The lever is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To operate it, pull forward
on the top of this lever
and tilt the seatback fully
forward toward the front
of the vehicle.
When you do, the seat bottom will release. Pull or push
the seat forward until it stops.
To return the seat to its regular position, return the
seatback to its upright position and push the whole seat
rearward by the seatback until it latches without pulling
forward on the adjustment lever.
After returning the seat to its regular position, try to
move the seat with your body in order to make sure the
seat is locked into place.
1-10
Rear Seat (Extended Cab)
Folding the Rear Seat
The extended cab’s rear seat can be folded up to provide
more cargo space. To fold the seat:
1. Pull forward on
the release strap
located under the
rear seat cushion.
2. Fold the seat cushion upward until it latches with
the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure the
seat is secure.
The extended cab’s rear seat can also be folded open for
more seating space. To use the seat:
1. Push rearward on the seat cushion while pulling up
on the release strap under the seat cushion. Pull the
seat cushion downward until it latches.
2. After pulling the seat cushion down, pull up on it to
make sure it is locked.
1-11
Rear Seat (Crew Cab)
The second row rear seat is a 60/40 split seat. Either side
of the rear seat may be folded down to give you more
cargo space.
Before folding the rear seat on the driver’s side, insert
the two buckles into the retainer in the seatback. That
way, the buckles will be out of the way when the seat is
folded and will be available for passengers to use when
the seat is returned to the passenger position. Also, make
sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat and that
the head restraints are completely lowered.
To fold, pull up on the
strap loop at the rear of the
seat cushion. Then, pull
the seat cushion up and
fold it forward.
After folding the seat cushion fully forward, pull the
seatback forward and fold the seatback down until it is
flat. If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes
with the cushion, try moving the front seat forward
and/or bringing the front seatback more upright. The
lever at the base of the seat must be turned rearward to
release the seatback.
To create a load floor, release the panels from the seatback
by pushing forward on the latch. Then fold the panels back
to cover the rear seat footwell area.
1-12
To return the seat to the passenger position, lift the floor
load panels and latch them into the seatback. Lift the
seatback up and push rearward all the way. Then lower
the seat cushion until it latches into position.
Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion
to make sure the seat is securely in place.
Check to see that the buckles on the driver’s side
seatback are accessible to the outboard and center
occupant and are not under the seat cushions.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-13
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
1-14
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.
Put someone on it.
1-15
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-16
or the instrument panel ... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-17
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-18
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
1-19
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-20
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit against your body.
1-21
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
1-22
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
1-23
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.
1-24
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-25
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags -- one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. All air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but don’t replace them.
Air bags are designed to work only in moderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants,
air bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.
1-26
CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, as you would be if you were leaning
forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with air
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual
called “Children.”
There is an air bag
readiness light on
the instrument panel,
which shows the
air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-27
How the Air Bag System Works
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-28
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person.
The path of an inflating air bag must be kept
clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant
and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other air bag covering.
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range. If your vehicle strikes something
that will move or deform, such as a parked car,
the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not
designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
1-29
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of
the right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag
module -- the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short time.
The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver
from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
1-30
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system. The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records speed,
engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or
the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may
not work properly. You may have to replace the
air bag module in the steering wheel or both
the air bag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open
or break the air bag coverings.
1-31
Air Bag Off Switch (Regular Cab and
Extended Cab Models)
Your vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel that
you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s
air bag. If your vehicle is a regular cab model or an
extended cab model, it has a switch on the instrument
panel that you can use to turn off the right front
passenger’s air bag.
This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF
if the person in the right front passenger’s position is
a member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the
front seat because:
my vehicle has no rear seat;
my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate
a rear-facing infant seat; or
the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the
front seat because:
my vehicle has no rear seat;
although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-32
Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical
condition which, according to his or her physician:
causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag
in a crash greater than the potential harm from
turning off the air bag and allowing the passenger,
even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield
in a crash.
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off
for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn
off the passenger’s air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group.
To turn off the right front passenger’s air bag, insert
your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to AIR BAG OFF.
The AIR BAG OFF light will come on to let you know
that the right front passenger’s air bag is off. The right
front passenger’s air bag will remain off until you turn it
back on again, and the AIR BAG OFF light will stay on
to remind you that the air bag is off.
1-33
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off.
If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup and
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
If your vehicle is an extended cab pickup and
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced.
To turn the right front passenger’s air bag on again,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in, and
move the switch to the ON position.
1-34
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.
To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to
the front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of
the vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.
1-35
Q: What if I add a snow plow? Will it keep the
air bags from working properly?
A: We’ve designed our air bag systems to work
properly under a wide range of conditions,
including snow plowing with vehicles equipped
with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package
(RPO VYU). But don’t change or defeat the
snow plow’s “tripping mechanism.” If you do,
it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle,
and it may cause an air bag inflation.
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
can sit in the center positions.
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-36
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Extended Cab and Crew Cab)
1-37
Lap-Shoulder Belt (Extended Cab and Crew Cab)
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock
if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-38
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
1-39
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-40
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
If your vehicle has a rear seat, your vehicle has
shoulder belt comfort guides. This feature will
provide added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults.
When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide
better positions the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the
interior body.
1-41
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-42
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Passenger Positions
(Extended Cab and Crew Cab)” earlier in this section.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Infants and Young Children
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use
the vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.
1-43
CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h),
a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-44
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its
air bag system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection that
a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased
by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height and age but also whether or not the restraint
will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which
it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-45
CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed
across the strongest part of an infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. Infants always should
be secured in appropriate infant restraints.
CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-46
Restraint Systems for Children
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-47
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-48
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps.
A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are
attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
1-49
Where to Put the Restraint
(Regular Cab Pickup)
The child restraint must be secured properly in the right
front passenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat, turn off
the passenger’s air bag. See “Air Bag Off Switch” and
“Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn
off the air bag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
(Extended Cab Pickup)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. There is limited space in the rear seating
area of an extended cab model. If you want to secure a
child restraint in a rear seating position of an extended
cab model, especially in the rear center position, be sure
to study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your
seat properly.
If a forward-facing child seat must be secured in the
vehicle’s right front seat, the seat should be moved back
as far as possible. However, it is better to secure the
restraint in a rear seat.
If you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s air
bag. See “Air Bag Off Switch” and “Securing a Child
Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index
for more on this, including important safety information.
1-50
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn
off the air bag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
(Crew Cab Pickup)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, including an
infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in
a booster seat.
If a forward-facing child seat must be secured in the
vehicle’s right front seat, the seat should be moved as
far back as possible. However, it is better to secure the
restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child riding in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-51
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be anchored.
1-52
Right Front Passenger Position Top Strap
Anchor (All Models)
You’ll find the top strap anchor for the right front
passenger seat behind the seat, near the floor.
If your vehicle is a regular cab model, there is also a
top strap anchor for the right front passenger position
located on the back panel of your vehicle, behind the
right front passenger seat. In order to get to the anchor,
you’ll have to remove the trim plug covering it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-53
Rear Seat Top Strap Anchors
(Extended Cab Models)
If your vehicle is an extended cab model, you’ll find the
top strap anchors for the rear seating positions near the
top of the seatback. In addition to the top strap anchors,
each seating position has a fabric loop at the top of the
seatback that you’ll use to route a top strap through.
When using a child restraint with a top strap in either
rear outboard position, raise the head restraint and route
the top strap through the fabric loop on the seatback.
Then, attach the top strap to the anchor point at the
center rear seating position.
1-54
When using a child restraint with a top strap in the
center rear position, route the top strap through the
fabric loop on the seatback. Then, raise the head
restraint and attach the top strap to the anchor point
located at the closest outboard position.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Rear Seat Top Strap Anchors
(Crew Cab Models)
If you vehicle is a crew cab model, you’ll find top strap
anchors for the rear seating positions located on the back
panel of your vehicle, behind the rear seat.
In order to get to the brackets, you’ll have to remove the
trim plugs covering them.
1-55
There are also anchorage points at the rear base of the
front passenger’s seat.
Anchor the top strap to one of these anchor points.
Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed. Raise the head restraint
and route the top strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle may have the LATCH system. If it does,
you’ll find anchors in the rear of the seat cushion.
For front passenger seat positions, there is an anchor
behind and to the bottom of the seat to secure the top
strap. For rear center seat positions, there is an anchor
near the driver’s side rear seat head restraint.
1-56
In order to use the system, you need either a forward-facing
child restraint that has attaching points (A) at its base and
a top tether anchor (B), or a rear-facing child restraint that
has attaching points (A), as shown here.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect a child sitting there. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position (Extended Cab) and
(Crew Cab)” or “Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index for
information on how to secure a child restraint in
your vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-57
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
Put the child restraint on the seat.
Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to
the anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
Attach the top strap to the top strap anchor.
See “Top Strap” in the Index. Tighten the top
strap according to the child restraint instructions.
Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect
the anchor points.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
(Extended Cab and Crew Cab)
There is limited space in the rear seating area of an
extended cab model. If you want to secure a child
restraint in a rear outside seating position, be sure to
study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to see if there is enough room to secure
your seat properly.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1-58
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the
child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-59
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
Don’t use child restraints in this position. The restraints
won’t work properly.
1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
(Extended Cab and Crew Cab)
If you have an extended cab or a crew cab pickup,
you can secure a child restraint in the center rear
seat position.
There is limited space in the rear seating area of an
extended cab model. If you want to secure a child
restraint in a rear seating position of an extended cab
model, especially in the rear center position, be sure
to study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your
seat properly.
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the
child in the child restraint when and as the instructions
say. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
1-61
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you
push down on the child restraint. If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
1-62
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. There’s a
switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn
off the right front passenger’s air bag when you want to
secure a rear-facing child restraint at the right front
passenger’s position. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in
the Index for more on this, including important
safety information.
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to
turn off the air bag before using a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front seat position.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable
for your child, always move the passenger seat
as far back as it will go.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could
inflate even though the switch is off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-63
CAUTION: (Continued)
If this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index.
Crew Cab Models: Your vehicle has a right front
passenger air bag. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
Regular Cab and Extended Cab Models: Your vehicle
has a right front passenger air bag. There’s a switch on
the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the
right front passenger’s air bag when you want to secure
a rear-facing child restraint at the right front passenger’s
position. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index for
more on this, including important safety information.
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to
turn off the air bag before using a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front seat position.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always move the passenger seat as far
back as it will go.
1-64
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off.
If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup and
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If your vehicle is an extended cab pickup and
this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat) until you have your vehicle
serviced. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the Index.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s air bag.
If your vehicle is a regular cab or an extended cab
and you are using a rear-facing child restraint in this
seat, make sure the air bag is turned off. See “Air
Bag Off Switch” in the Index. If your child restraint
is forward-facing, always move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing it in this seat.
See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-65
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-66
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint in a
regular cab pickup or an extended cab pickup, turn on
the right front passenger’s air bag when you remove
the rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless
the person who will be sitting there is a member of a
passenger air bag risk group. See “Air Bag Off Switch”
in the Index.
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off
for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn
off the passenger’s air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See “Air Bag Off
Switch” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-67
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should
not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-68
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In a crash, the two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured. A belt must be
used by only one person at a time.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
1-69
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way,
in a crash the child might slide under the belt.
The belt’s force would then be applied right on
the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-70
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system
earlier in this section.
2- 2-1
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-1 Windows
2-5 Keys
2-6 Door Locks
2-10 Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
2-13 Rear Doors
2-14 Tailgate
2-15 Theft
2-16 Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
2-17 Passlock
2-18 New Vehicle “Break-In”
2-18 Ignition Positions
2-20 Starting Your Engine
2-23 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
2-24 Automatic Transmission Operation
2-28 Manual Transmission Operation
2-34 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2-43 Parking Brake
2-44 Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
2-46 Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
2-47 Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission Models Only)
2-47 Parking Over Things That Burn
2-48 Engine Exhaust
2-48 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
2-49 Manual Selectable Ride (If Equipped)
2-51 Locking Rear Axle
2-52 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
2-58 Exterior Lamps
2-61 Interior Lamps
2-63 Mirrors
2-76 OnStar System (If Equipped)
2-80 The Instrument Panel - Your
Information System
2-82 Instrument Panel Cluster
2-84 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-99 Message Center
2-2
Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by
the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower
manual windows.
2-3
Power Windows (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped
with power windows, the
controls are located on each
of the side doors in the front
and rear.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger window
as well. Your power windows will work when the
ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is present.
See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
Press the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower or raise the window.
The driver’s window also has an express down feature
that allows the window to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press and hold the rear of the window switch
for one second to activate the express down mode.
The express down mode can be canceled at any time by
pressing the opposite side of the switch. To open the
window partway, lightly tap the switch until the window
is at the desired position.
If you have power windows on a Crew Cab, the driver’s
door power window switch has a lockout feature. This
feature prevents the rear windows from operating except
from the driver’s position when the driver’s door button
labeled WINDOW LOCK is engaged. When the button
is not engaged, the rear power windows will operate.
2-4
Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab)
To open a rear swing-out
window, flip the latch open
and swing the glass out.
The latch will catch when the window is fully open and
it will also hold it in the open position.
Sliding Rear Window (If Equipped)
To open the sliding rear window, unlock the latch lever
by pushing the lever toward the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Release the lever from the latch plate and slide
the window toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To close the window, slide the window toward the driver’s
side of the vehicle. The latch lever will automatically snap
on to the latch plate. Try to open the window without
releasing the latch lever to be sure the window is in the
locked position.
2-5
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-6
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
Your vehicle may also have
a key that locks and unlocks
only the center floor
console (if equipped).
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers -- especially children -- can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-7
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the keyless entry system (if equipped).
You can also use your key.
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the lever
rearward. To unlock
the door, slide the
lever forward.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the raised side of the
switch, marked “L” on
either front door to lock
all the doors at once.
Press the recessed side of the switch marked “U” to
unlock all the doors at once.
2-8
If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the bottom of the
switch on either front door
to lock all the doors at once.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once.
The power door locks will operate at any time without
the ignition being on.
The power door locks will also automatically lock when
the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). To unlock the
doors, refer to the instructions listed previously. The
automatic locking feature can be disabled, if you prefer.
See “Programmable Automatic Door Locks” in the
following text.
Operating the power locks may interact with the
theft-deterrent system (if equipped). See “Content
Theft-Deterrent” in the Index.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an auto lock/unlock feature
which enables you to program your power door locks.
Your vehicle left the factory programmed to have the
automatic lock feature lock all the doors when the
vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for two
seconds, and then unlock all the doors once the key is
removed from the ignition. The following instructions
detail how to program your door locks.
To enter the program mode you need to do the following:
1. Beginning with the ignition in OFF, pull back on the
turn signal/multifunction lever all the way toward
you and hold it while you perform the next step.
2. Turn your key to ON and OFF twice. Then, with the
key in OFF, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the following four programming
options and follow the instructions. You will have
ten seconds to begin programming. If you exceed the
ten second limit, the locks will automatically lock and
unlock to indicate you have left the program mode.
2-9
If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning with
Step 1. You can exit the program mode any time by
turning the ignition to ON (the locks will automatically
lock and unlock to indicate you are leaving the
program mode). If the lock/unlock switches are not
pressed while in the programming mode, the auto
lock/unlock setting will not be modified.
The following is a list of the available programming options:
All doors lock/Only the driver’s door unlocks:
Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the
door panel once and then the unlock side once. This
option is unavailable on most vehicles not equipped
with keyless entry.
All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the lock side
of the power lock switch on the door panel once, and
then the unlock side twice (this is the factory setting).
All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
once, and then the unlock side three times.
No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
twice. This turns off the automatic lock feature.
For more information, see your dealer.
Lockout Prevention
To protect you from locking your key in the vehicle, this
feature stops the power door locks from locking when
the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Child Security Locks (Crew Cabs)
(If Equipped)
With this feature, you can
lock the rear side doors
so that they cannot be
opened from the inside by
passengers. This feature is
located on the inside of the
rear doors.
Move the button forward to engage the security feature.
Move the button rearward to return the door locks to
normal operation.
2-10
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote system. If the transmitter does
not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the transmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Operation
UNLOCK: Pressing this button once will unlock
the driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash and the
interior lights will come on. Pressing UNLOCK again
within three seconds will cause the remaining doors to
unlock. The parking lamps will flash and the interior
lights will come on.
2-11
LOCK: Pressing this button once will lock all of the
doors. Press LOCK again within three seconds and the
horn will chirp.
Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact
with the theft-deterrent system. See “Content-Theft
Deterrent” in the Index.
Remote Panic Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol on the keyless
entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the
headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,
waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
2-12
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter, do
the following:
1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal that has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for
seven seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
2-13
Rear Doors
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear access
door(s) that allows easier access to the rear area of the
extended cab.
To open a rear access door
from the outside, first open
the front door. Then, use the
handle located on the front
edge of the rear access door
to open it.
You must fully close a rear access door before you can
close the front door.
To open a rear access door
from the inside, the front
door must be opened first.
Then, use the handle located
on the inside of the rear
access door to open it.
If your vehicle is a Crew Cab, you can open your doors from
the inside or outside. Your vehicle may also have a feature
which prevents children from opening rear doors. See “Child
Security Locks” in the Index for more information.
2-14
Tailgate
You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle
while pulling the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards
you to be sure it latches securely.
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow for
different loading situations. Although the tailgate can
be removed without assistance, you may want someone
to assist you with the removal to avoid possible damage
to the vehicle.
To remove the tailgate, do the following:
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and release both
retaining cable clips.
To release the retaining
cable clips, lift the cable
so it points straight out
and push the cable
clip forward.
2. With the tailgate at a
slight upward angle, pull
back on the tailgate at
the right edge and then
move the tailgate to the
right to release the
left edge.
Reverse the above procedure to reinstall. Make sure the
tailgate is secure.
2-15
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
If you have a manual transmission, your steering wheel
will be locked, and so will your ignition. If you have an
automatic transmission, your ignition and transmission
will be locked. Also remember to lock the doors.
If the key is in the ignition, with any door open, and you
try to lock your doors with the power door locks, the
driver’s door will not stay locked. This will help to keep
you from locking your keys in the vehicle.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your
ignition key? What if you have to leave something
valuable in your vehicle?
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
Valuables can be locked in the center floor console.
If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system,
take the transmitter with you.
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content
Theft-Deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
SECURITY message will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).
This message reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
message should come on and stay on. If using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does not
need to be open.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY message should go
off after approximately 15 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY message goes off.
If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s
headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about
two minutes, then will turn off to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the
alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by
placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START.
2-17
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY message to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.
Passlock
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY message flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY message
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn
the engine off. However, your Passlock system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.
You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer
for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
2-18
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
Ignition Positions
You can use your key to turn your ignition switch to
five different positions.
ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use things
like the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off. Push in the key and turn it
toward you.
2-19
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK will lock the steering column and result
in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only
to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while
the vehicle is moving.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine.
Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is
being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
2-20
Key Release Button (Manual Transmission)
The ignition key cannot be
removed from the ignition
of manual transmission
vehicles unless the key
release button is used.
To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles,
turn the key to OFF, then press the button and turn the
key to LOCK. Do not hold the button in while turning
the key to OFF. Pull the key straight out.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up
to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows and overhead console will work
when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the
key is turned from RUN to OFF, these features will continue
to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start
the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is
not all the way down -- that’s a safety feature.
2-21
Starting Your V8 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your
battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0 F or -18 C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there. When the
engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator
pedal to maintain engine speed, if you have to, until
your engine has run for a while.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
about three seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep
the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
2-22
Starting Your V6 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key in
START for not more than 10 seconds. Then, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, unless it starts sooner.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but
then stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
2-23
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather,
0F (-18 C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can
help. You’ll get easier
starting and better fuel
economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heater should be
plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting
your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.
2-24
Automatic Transmission Operation
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, it features an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument panel cluster. This
display must be powered anytime the shift lever is
capable of being moved out of PARK (P). This means
that if your key is in OFF, rather than LOCK, there will
be a small current drain on your battery which could
discharge your battery over a period of time. If you have
to leave your key in the ignition in OFF for an extended
period, it is recommended that you remove the
IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse block.
See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine because
your vehicle can’t move easily. If your vehicle is equipped
with the Allison Transmission, use park for stationary
operation of the Power Takeoff (PTO) (if equipped).
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-25
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll -- even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. If your vehicle
is equipped with the Allison Transmission, the “R” may
blink on the PRNDL if the shift inhibitor is active.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped. If your vehicle is equipped with
the Allison Transmission, do not idle in
REVERSE (R) for more than five minutes.
Extended idling in REVERSE (R) may cause
transmission overheating and damage. Always
select PARK (P) whenever idle time exceeds
five minutes.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-26
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people
or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if
the transmission shifts too often.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the Allison
Transmission, do not idle in DRIVE (D) for more
than five minutes. Extended idling in DRIVE (D)
may cause transmission overheating and damage.
Always select PARK (P) if idle time is longer than
five minutes.
2-27
If your vehicle is equipped with the Allison Transmission,
it will initially attain first range when DRIVE (D) is
selected. As vehicle speed increases, the transmission
will upshift automatically through each available range
up to FIFTH (5). As the vehicle slows, the transmission
will downshift automatically.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty
automatic transmission, the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the
speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position
on a hill.
On cold days, approximately 32 F (0 C) or colder,
your transmission is designed to shift differently until
the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
This is intended to improve heater performance.
2-28
Tow/Haul Mode Selector Switch
(Automatic Transmission)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul mode. The
selector switch is located on the end of the column shift
lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the
Index for more information.
Manual Transmission Operation
5-Speed (VORTEC 6000 V8 Engine)
Here’s how to operate
your transmission.
FIRST (1) is intended only for heavy loads or trailer
towing and is not recommended for normal driving.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle use, start
your vehicle moving in FIRST (1). This allows clutch
components to break-in properly.
2-29
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal. Shift into FIRST (1)
only when the vehicle is below 5 mph (8 km/h). If you
try to shift down into FIRST (1) at excessive vehicle
speeds, the shift lever will not move into FIRST (1)
until vehicle speed is reduced.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into SECOND (2) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into SECOND (2), put the shift
lever into NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into SECOND (2).
If you try to downshift into SECOND (2) at excessive
vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into the
SECOND (2) position until the vehicle speed is reduced.
THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
THIRD (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into the higher
forward gears the same way you do for THIRD (3).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake
pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal
and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch
pedal. Wait for the vehicle to stop moving and then, shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly
while pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle.
2-30
5-Speed
(VORTEC 4300 V6 and 4800 V8 Engines)
Here’s how to operate your transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever into NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake
pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal
and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch
pedal. Wait for the vehicle to stop moving and then, shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly
while pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle.
2-31
6-Speed
(VORTEC 8100 V8 and DURAMAX
6600 V8 Engines)
Here’s how to operate
your transmission.
This 6-speed pattern is unique to GM manual
transmissions. The transmission always repositions the
shift lever to NEUTRAL, which is located between
FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) gear.
To prevent unintentional gear selections, additional force
is required to move the shift lever into REVERSE (R) or
FIRST (1). Use FIRST (1) when trailer towing, driving
with payload in the pickup box or launching on a grade.
Otherwise, start in SECOND (2) gear. Only shift into
FIRST (1) when the vehicle has stopped moving.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle use, start
the vehicle moving in FIRST (1) gear. This allows the
clutch components to wear-in properly.
FIRST (1): With the vehicle at a stop, release the
brake, press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST (1).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal. Only downshift into FIRST (1) when
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. If the shift
lever will not go into FIRST (1), put the lever in
NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch pedal to fully
engage the clutch. Press the clutch pedal again.
Then, shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): With the vehicle at a stop, release
the brake, press the clutch pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal. With the vehicle moving,
press the clutch pedal and upshift into SECOND (2) from
FIRST (1) while applying light pressure to the right on
the shifter. Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal. If you come to a complete stop
and the shift lever will not go into SECOND (2), put the
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch pedal to
fully engage the clutch. Press the clutch pedal again.
Then, shift into SECOND (2).
2-32
THIRD (3): Press the clutch pedal and upshift into
THIRD (3). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6): Upshift
into the higher forward gears the same way as you do
THIRD (3). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.
Wait for the vehicle to stop moving and then, shift to
REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal. Also, use REVERSE (R),
along with the parking brake, when turning off your
engine and parking your vehicle.
Shift Speeds
CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of your vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Do not allow the engine rpm to overspeed and enter the
tachometer red lines. Engine overspeed occurs when
downshifting, or descending a grade, at too high a
vehicle speed. When going down steep grades, always
select a gear at least one position lower than you would
use on climbing a grade. This will allow the vehicle’s
engine to provide some braking and help to slow the
vehicle as it goes down the grade. Monitor your vehicle
speed, acceleration and engine rpm while applying the
brakes as you go down the grade to ensure you have
complete control over the vehicle.
2-33
If your engine speed drops below 600 rpm, or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. When operating on slippery
surfaces, downshift at lower than normal vehicle speeds
to prevent the tires from slipping.
In bench seat equipped vehicles, move the tallest
beverage containers to the right cupholder to provide
additional clearance for the shift lever.
For vehicles equipped with a center console, the front
cup holder pulls out and turns 180 to provide additional
clearance between tall beverage containers and the
shift lever.
Shift Light
If you have a manual
transmission, you may have
a SHIFT light. This light
will show you when to shift
to the next higher gear for
best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions allow.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and
off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped
with a manual transmission, disregard the SHIFT light
when the transfer case is in 4-Wheel Low.
Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
2-34
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send
your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel drive. See the
appropriate text for the transfer case in your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4HI) or
4-WHEEL LOW (4LO) positions for a long time
on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of
your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to
lock or unlock is normal.
Manual Transfer Case (If Equipped)
The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the
driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
The 4WD indicator will
light up when you shift into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting
is normal.
2-35
An indicator on the bezel near the lever shows you the
transfer case settings:
2-Wheel High (2HI): This setting is used for driving
in most street and highway situations. Your front axle
is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
4-Wheel High (4HI): Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages your front
axle to help drive your vehicle. This is the best setting to
use when plowing snow.
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P), or if you have a manual
transmission, even if you are in gear. You or
someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure
to set the parking brake before placing the
transfer case in NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): Shift to this setting only when your
vehicle needs to be towed. The ignition switch must be
in RUN in order to shift the lever into NEUTRAL (N).
See “Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing your
Vehicle” in the Index.
4-Wheel Low (4L0): This setting also engages your
front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need
4LO. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. You
might choose 4LO if you are driving off-road in deep
sand, deep mud, deep snow and climbing or descending
steep hills.
2-36
You can shift from 2-Wheel High (2HI) to
4-Wheel High (4HI) or from 4-Wheel High (4HI) to
2-Wheel High (2HI) while the vehicle is moving. Your
front axle will engage faster if you take your foot off of
the accelerator for a couple of seconds after you shift.
In extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to stop
or slow the vehicle to shift into 4-Wheel High (4HI).
To shift into or out of 4-Wheel Low (4LO)
or NEUTRAL (N):
1. Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1 to 3 mph
(2 to 5 km/h) and shift an automatic transmission
into NEUTRAL (N), or with a manual transmission,
press the clutch pedal.
2. Shift the transfer case shift lever in
one continuous motion.
Don’t pause in NEUTRAL (N) as you shift the transfer
case into 4-Wheel Low (4LO), or your gears could clash.
Remember that driving in 4-Wheel High (4HI) or
4-Wheel Low (4LO) may reduce fuel economy. Also,
driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could
cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer
case harder to shift and run noisier.
Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
The transfer case switches
are located to the left of the
instrument panel cluster.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
2-37
You can choose among four driving settings:
2HI: This setting is used for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best
fuel economy.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle
senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically
engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in
slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.
4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on
snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This
setting also engages your front axle to help drive your
vehicle. This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and
delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,
deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information.
2-38
Indicator lights in the switches show which setting your
transfer case is in. The indicator lights will come on
briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay
on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your
vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light will
flash while the transfer case is being shifted. It will
remain illuminated when the shift is complete. If for
some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested
shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take
your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD” in the Index for further information.
Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch. This can
be done at any speed (except when shifting from 4LO),
and the indicator light will flash while shifting. It will
remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed (except when shifting from 4LO).
Shifting to 4LO
To shift to 4LO, the ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method
for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to
2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch.
You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and
remain illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI your vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN.
The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and
release the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait
for the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
2-39
If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but
will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving
less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is
in NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting to NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure
the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO
buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
2-40
Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the electronic
transfer case, the transfer case switches are located to
the left of the instrument panel cluster.
Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive.
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help drive
your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such
as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give
you extra traction. You may never need 4LO. It sends
the maximum power to all four wheels. You might
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly
when you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting
will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should
take your vehicle in for service. An indicator light will
flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the
shift is completed. If for some reason the transfer
cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last
chosen setting.
2-41
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI
Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically
with some delay.
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically
with some delay.
Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO
To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for
shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to
2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch.
You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing
and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
into gear.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). The transfer case will
shift to 4HI while waiting to complete the shift to 4LO if
you are shifting from 2HI.
Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method
for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the
4HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to
stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear
and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
2-42
Shifting to NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure
the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and
4LO buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL
light will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for
one second, then shift the transmission to
DRIVE (D) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).
4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.
5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
2-43
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
flash. A chime will activate when the parking brake is
applied and the vehicle is moved at least 3 mph (5 km/h)
for at least three seconds.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE
RELEASE, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-44
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. With four-wheel drive if your
transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will
be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. If you’re pulling
a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
Pull the shift lever toward you.
2-45
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not
in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. If you have
four-wheel drive with a manual transfer
case shift lever and your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. And, if you leave the vehicle with the
engine running, it could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
2-46
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system, you have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in
the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to the OFF ignition position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-47
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission Models Only)
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the manual
transmission is in gear. You or someone else could
be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever
into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition
key to OFF, remove the key and release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if you are pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-48
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution
under “Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.
2-49
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case
in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
Manual Selectable Ride (If Equipped)
The main function of this system is to provide superior
ride comfort while trailering or fully loaded, as well as
for unloaded driving. This system also helps to provide:
Improved trailering stability
Improved handling response when trailering or
fully loaded
This button is located on
the center of the instrument
panel near the radio. Press
it to activate the selectable
ride setting as desired.
An indicator light near
the button will illuminate
whenever the system
is active.
2-50
It is recommended to use this system as follows:
For optimum ride comfort in an unloaded vehicle the
button should be out and the indicator light will not
be illuminated. This switch position indicates
NORMAL levels of ride control or damping.
For optimum ride comfort when trailering, fully
loaded, driving off-road, or when personal
preferences demand more control the button should
be pressed in with the indicator light illuminated.
This switch position indicates FIRM levels of ride
control or damping.
The following guide can also be used to help determine
the best setting.
NORMAL: The indicator light will be off when the
system is in this setting. Use for normal city and
highway driving. Provides a smooth, soft ride when
the vehicle is unloaded.
FIRM (Unloaded): Press the switch to activate this
setting, the indicator light will illuminate. Use this
setting when road conditions or personal preference
demand more control. Provides more “feel” or response
to the road conditions.
FIRM (Loaded): Press the switch to activate this
setting, the indicator light will illuminate. Use this
setting to minimize trailer inputs to the vehicle or
when the vehicle is fully loaded. This setting is also
appropriate for off-road driving.
You can select a setting at any time based on road
and trailering conditions to provide the best ride and
handling. Select a new setting whenever driving
conditions change.
2-51
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
The tilt steering wheel
allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before
you drive.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
2-52
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the arrow
flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident.
If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn,
check for burned-out bulbs or a blown fuse (see “Fuses
and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
2-53
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a
mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam or high
to low beam, pull the multifunction lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.
Flash-To-Pass Feature
This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear it click.
If your headlamps are off or on low-beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long
as you hold the lever toward you and the high-beam
indicator on the instrument panel will come on. Release
the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
2-54
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.
The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move
the band to the OFF position.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop or
return to your preset speed.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
2-55
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does
not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, or press the clutch pedal
(if equipped), the cruise control will disengage.
CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
2-56
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
United States Canada
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake or press the clutch pedal
(if equipped). This, of course, disengages the cruise
control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A briefly, the vehicle will
keep going faster until you release the switch or apply
the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold
the switch at R/A.
2-57
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Press and hold the SET button at the end of the lever
until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Step lightly on the clutch pedal (if equipped).
Move the cruise control switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-58
Exterior Lamps
Your parking lamp and headlamp switch is on the
driver’s side of your instrument panel.
Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to
manually turn on the following:
Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol to
turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off
your lamps and put the system in auto headlamp mode.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille.
Be sure it is not covered, or the system will be on
whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
2-59
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later in
this section for more information.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To disable the
chime, turn the thumbwheel all the way down. In the
automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the
ignition key is in OFF.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
Fully functional daytime running lights are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode,
the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P),
the light sensor determines it is daytime and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the
last chosen headlamp setting that was used.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate,
provided it is not dark outside.
To idle an automatic transmission equipped vehicle with
the DRL off, set the parking brake. Shifting the
transmission into PARK (P) will also allow you to idle
the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay off
until you release the parking brake or shift the
transmission out of PARK (P).
2-60
To idle a manual transmission equipped vehicle with the
DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off
until you release the parking brake.
The following procedure applies only to vehicles first
sold in the United States.
When necessary, you may turn off the Automatic
Headlamp System and the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) feature by following these steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times
within six seconds. After the fourth press of the
button, a chime will sound informing you the system
is off. The system will revert back to the automatic
mode when the ignition is turned off and on again.
3. To return to the automatic mode, push the DOME
OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds
(the chime will sound), or turn the ignition off
and on again.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better vision in
foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lamps and/or
low-beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp switch is
located on the left side of
your instrument panel.
Press the switch to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
switch again to turn them off. An indicator light will
glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use the fog lamps in the
dark without turning on the headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever the high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
2-61
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after
you restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp switch again.
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, this switch includes
wiring provisions for a
dealer or a qualified service
center to install an auxiliary
roof lamp. This switch is
located on the center of the
instrument panel near the
comfort controls.
When the switch wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the switch will activate the lamp
and illuminate an indicator light near the button. Pressing
the switch again will turn off the roof mounted lamp.
If your vehicle has this switch, your vehicle may have
the snow plow prep package. For further information see
“Snow Plow Prep Package” in the Index.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
The instrument panel intensity control is located to the
right of the headlamp switch.
Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel
lights. To turn on the dome lamps (with the vehicle
doors closed) turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will not
come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in.
Illuminated Entry
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on if
the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the “out” position.
If the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in, the
lamps will not come on.
2-62
Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has reading
lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to
turn the lamp on. The lamps
can be adjusted to point in
the direction you want.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the parking/headlamps
knob, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps
will remain on whether the doors are opened or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the dome
lamps to come on automatically when the doors are
opened, or remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the
button into the “in” position. With the button in this
position, the dome lamps will remain off when the doors
are open. To return the lamps to automatic operation,
press the button again and return it to the “out” position.
With the button in this position, the dome lamps will
come on when you open a door.
2-63
Cargo Lamp
Press the button to turn the
cargo lamp on. Press the
button again to turn it off.
A message in the instrument
panel cluster will come on
and display CARGO LAMP
ON when the cargo lamp is
turned on and the ignition
key is turned to RUN.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, reading, glove box,
cargo and underhood lamps if they are left on for more
than 20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep
your battery from running down.
Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.
2-64
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature Display
(If Equipped)
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims
to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at the
same time. The dual display can be turned on or off by
briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.
Temperature Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly, will
toggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternate the
temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius, press
and hold the TEMP button for three seconds until the display
blinks F and C . Press and release the TEMP button to
toggle between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After
five seconds of inactivity, the display will stop blinking and
display the last selection made.
Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the
temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius. If an
abnormal reading is displayed, please consult your dealer.
2-65
Electrochromic Mirror Operation
The time period you need to press and hold the
TEMP button to turn the electrochromic feature on or
off is fifteen seconds. The indicator light to the right of
the TEMP button will still turn on or off to show you
when the electrochromic feature is activated.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if:
After five seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (“N” for North, for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder
or a similar magnetic item.
The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, “CAL” must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If “CAL” is not displayed,
push in the “COMP” button for approximately
eight seconds or until “CAL” is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:
Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h)
or less until the display reads a direction, or
Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after
several turns the compass will become calibrated and
will display a direction.
2-66
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Use the COMP button located at the bottom of
the mirror.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for three seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map. 4. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button in, the display will
show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-67
Outside Manual Adjust Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of
your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
Some mirrors can be folded in, to enter narrow doorways.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect
mirror performance.
Camper-Type Outside Mirrors (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of
objects behind you.
Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
West Coast-Type Outside Mirrors
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the west coast-type
mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clear
view of objects behind you.
A. Outer Mirror Frame
B. Mirror Head
C. Nut
The mirrors can be adjusted by turning the
mirror head (B) and moving the outer mirror frame (A)
backward or forward. You can also loosen the nut (C)
on the top and bottom of the outer mirror frame to
tilt the mirror head.
2-68
Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
The control is located on
the driver’s door armrest.
Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the
mirror you want to adjust, then press the arrows on the
lower control pad to adjust the mirror.
Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
The outside rearview mirrors with this feature have a
defrost mode.
To turn on the defrost feature, press the rear window
defogger button. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the
Index for further information.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
2-69
Storage Compartments
Your vehicle includes a number of storage
compartments for storage of often-used items.
Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrument panel.
Use these spaces for items such as gloves or small books.
Some models have a storage pocket on each of
the front doors.
Some vehicles have a storage area behind the seat.
Glove Box
To open your glove box, pull the lever upward and pull
the door downward.
Center Overhead Console (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an overhead console. The long
overhead console has three storage compartments inside
it and the short overhead console has one compartment
inside it.
Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have the long overhead console, a garage door
opener can be installed in the front overhead compartment.
1. To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the release
button forward.
2. Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch. Press it
firmly to the back of
your garage door opener,
as close to the center of
the opener as possible.
2-70
3. Center the garage door opener activation button over
the console door button, and press the opener firmly
into place.
The pegs inside the compartment door are used to
make sure the button on the compartment door will
contact the control button on the garage door opener.
4. Add one peg at a
time until, with the
compartment door
closed, the PUSH button
on the compartment
door will operate the
garage door opener.
5. Now, with the
compartment door
closed, press the button
marked PUSH again to
make sure the garage
door opener
operates properly.
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you should only
have to press the PUSH button slightly to operate
the opener.
6. Adjust the position of the garage door opener and
add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener
operates properly.
2-71
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
If you have the long overhead console, the center overhead
compartment can be used to store your sunglasses.
To open the center compartment, press the release
button located at the rear of the compartment door.
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.
The rear compartment can be used to store a small item,
like a book.
To open the rear compartment, press the release button
located at the rear of the compartment door.
Instrument Panel Cupholder (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a cupholder in the middle of the
instrument panel.
To use the cupholder, pull the cupholder out of the
instrument panel.
To close the cupholder, push it back into the
instrument panel.
2-72
Center Console Storage Area (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a console compartment between
the bucket seats.
To open it, insert the console key into the lock and
unlock the console. Press the button and swing the
console lid open. The console has a place to store
tissues, pens and a clip to hold business cards.
Your console may have a cupholder that swings down
for the rear seat passengers to use. The front cupholder
pulls out and swivels 180 to provide clearance between
tall beverage containers and the manual transmission
shift lever (if equipped).
Your vehicle may have a compact disc holder in
the console.
Armrest Storage Compartment
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage
compartment in the front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the
lid pop up and swing open.
The storage compartment has a cassette/compact disc holder.
The holder will store up to six compact disc cases and
five cassette tape cases or a total of 11 cassette tape cases.
If not used to store cassette or compact disc cases, the
storage area can be used to store a laptop computer.
To use the writing table, pull the latch at the rear of the
table and swing the writing table forward. Use it to hold
a pad of paper and a pen.
2-73
Tonneau Cover (If Equipped)
1. To remove, unsnap the
cover. Roll up and stow
using the buckle and the
strap located at the front
of the box.
A. Back rail
B. Side rail
C. Rear bow
D. Center bow
E. Front bow
F. Front rail
Remove the tonneau cover from the notch in the front
rail from the driver’s side of the vehicle.
2-74
2. Remove the three bows by gently pushing them
against the spring-loaded end. The three bows are
labeled front/center/rear to remind you in which
order to reinstall them.
3. To add cargo to the box,
remove all bows and the
back rail and stow
them safely.
To clean the tonneau cover, use mild soap and water.
If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt
trapped in the grain of the material.
2-75
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Front Ashtray
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel. Pull on the bottom of the ashtray door
to open it.
NOTICE:
If you store paper or other things that burn in
your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle.
Do not store papers and other things that burn in
your ashtrays.
To remove the front ashtray, press the retainer spring
and pull the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray,
place the ashtray on the slides at the side of its location
in the instrument panel. Then slide the ashtray back to
its original position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it’s heating can make it overload, damaging
the lighter and the heating element. Just push the
lighter all the way in and let go. When it’s done,
it will pop back by itself.
2-76
Accessory Power Outlets
Two accessory power outlets are located near the
cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile
telephones or other devices designed to operate with
vehicle electrical systems.
The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the
receptacle to the right of the accessory power outlets.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlets and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power outlets.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them out to help block glare at the
front and side windows.
The passenger’s side sun visor may have a vanity mirror.
Cellular Telephone (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be prewired for a cellular telephone.
Please consult your GM dealer or a qualified service
center for further information.
OnStar System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications system that
offers a variety of services and provides a hands-free
communication link between you and the OnStar Center.
A service subscription agreement and fee are required in
order to receive OnStar service. Services are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For more information,
call 1-888-ONSTAR-7 (1-888-667-8277).
2-77
OnStar Services Button: Press this button once
to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with
these services. If you are not quickly connected, the
system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures
connection to the center; there is no additional action
required. Press the Call Answer/End button to cancel the
automatic redial.
Emergency Button: In an emergency situation,
press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the
call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and
assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert
the nearest emergency service provider.
Call ANSWER/END Button: Use this button
to answer a call. (If you are receiving a call, the audio
system will mute, and the ring will be heard). Press this
button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the
audio system to its previous settings. This button will
also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally
pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated.
Volume Control: You can control the volume of the
OnStar System using either the volume control knob on
the radio or using the steering wheel controls, if equipped.
Telltale Light: This light will indicate the status of
the system. A solid green light will come on when you
start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on
and is ready to make or receive calls.
If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or
outgoing call is in progress. Press the Call ANSWER/END
button if you notice the light blinking and you are not
on a call.
The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system
malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar button to
attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection is made,
the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make
sure that the system is functioning properly. If you
cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your
dealership as soon as possible for assistance.
2-78
Safety and Security Services
Automatic Notification of Air Bag
Deployment -- If an air bag deploys, a priority
emergency signal is sent automatically to the center.
An advisor will locate your vehicle’s position, try to
contact you and assist you in the situation. If the
center is unable to contact you, an emergency service
provider will be contacted.
Stolen Vehicle Tracking -- Call the center at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report your
vehicle stolen. The system can then locate and track
your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify
the proper authorities.
Roadside Assistance with Location -- For vehicle
breakdowns, press the OnStar button. An advisor
will contact the appropriate help.
Remote Diagnostics -- If an instrument panel
light comes on, the center can perform a check of
the engine on-board computer. An advisor can then
recommend what action needs to be taken.
OnStar MED-NET -- Med-Net can store your
personal medical history and provide it to emergency
personnel if necessary.
Accident Assist -- An advisor can provide
step-by-step guidance following an accident.
Remote Door Unlock -- To contact the center, call
1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide
your security information. An advisor will send a
command to your vehicle to unlock itself. The
advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle. Remote
Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is
parked to maintain the battery charge.
Vehicle Locator Service -- To contact the center,
call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to
provide your security information. An advisor will
send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn
and/or flash the lamps.
In order to provide you with excellent service, calls with
the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded.
2-79
Premium Services (Includes Safety
and Security Services)
Route Support -- An advisor can provide directions
or guidance to anywhere you want to go. In addition,
they can help you locate gas stations, rest areas,
ATMs, hospitals, hotels, stores, eateries and more.
Concierge Services -- The concierge advisor can
obtain tickets, reservations or help with vacation/trip
planning and other unique items and services.
Ride Assist -- An advisor can locate transportation
in the event that you are unable to drive.
OnStar System Limitations
Complete limitations can be found on the subscriber
services agreement.
OnStar Service is:
available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska,
Hawaii and Canada;
available when the vehicle is within the operating
range of a cellular provider;
subject to limitations caused by atmospheric
conditions, such as severe weather or topographical
conditions, such as mountainous terrain.
subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.
Global positioning capabilities used to deliver service
will not be available if satellite signals are obstructed.
OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is
discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative
if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle
electrical system components are damaged.
Safety and security services are provided by existing
governmental emergency service providers. OnStar
will use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate
emergency service provider and request assistance
but cannot promise that they will respond to the
call in a timely manner or at all.
2-80
The Instrument Panel - Your Information System
2-81
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Dome Lamp Switch
B. Lamp Controls
C. Air Outlets
D. Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)/Electronic
Transfer Case (If Equipped)/Traction Assist
System (If Equipped)
E. Multifunction Lever
F. Instrument Cluster
G. Gearshift Lever (Automatic Transmission)
H. Tow/Haul Selector Switch
I. Audio System
J. Comfort Control System
K. Glove Box
L. Passenger Air Bag Off Switch
M. Manual Selectable Ride Control (If Equipped)
N. Ashtray
O. Storage Area or Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
P. Rear Window Defogger Switch (If Equipped)
Q. Lighter and Accessory Power Outlets
R. Parking Brake Release
S. Tilt Lever (If Equipped)
T. Center Instrument Panel Utility Block
U. Hood Release
V. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
2-82
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Heavy Duty Automatic Transmission version shown.
Canada, Light Duty Automatic and Manual Transmission clusters similar.
2-83
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a
glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and
many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Press the reset button to toggle between the trip
odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset
button for two seconds while the trip odometer is
displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The odometer can also display the number of hours the
engine has run. To display the hour meter, turn the
ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least
four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for up to
30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
NOTICE:
On vehicles with a manual transmission, if you
operate the engine with the tachometer in the
red area, your engine or other parts could
be damaged.
Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by
operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered
by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the
engine with the tachometer in the red area.
2-84
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a driver information system
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See “Message Center” in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about six seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then
it will flash for
about 55 seconds.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
2-85
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag
modules, the wiring, the passenger air bag suppression
circuit and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag”
in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a problem.
2-86
Air Bag Off Light
When you turn the right front passenger’s air bag off,
this light will come on and stay on to remind you that
the air bag has been turned off. This light will go off
when you turn the air bag back on again. See “Air Bag
Off Switch” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off
for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn
off the passenger’s air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See “Air Bag Off
Switch” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
2-87
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off.
If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup and this
ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
If your vehicle is an extended cab pickup and this
ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced.
Voltmeter
United States Canada
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in
RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge
in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
2-88
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Shift Light (If Equipped)
This light is used on
some models with
manual transmissions.
The SHIFT indicator light will help you get the best fuel
economy. See “Shift Light” or “Shift Speeds” in the
index for more information.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash
if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to
drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound
when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States Canada
2-89
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-90
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
United States Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210 F (100 C) or less. If you are pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250 F (122 C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260 F (125 C) mark, it indicates that
the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Transmission Temperature Gage
(If Equipped)
United States Canada
Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperature
of the transmission fluid. The normal operating range is
from 100 F (38 C) to about 265 F (130 C).
2-91
At approximately 265 F (130 C), the message center
will display a TRANS FLUID HOT message and the
transmission will enter a transmission protection mode.
When the transmission enters the protection mode, you
may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. The transmission will return to normal shifting
patterns when the transmission fluid temperature falls
below 260 F (127 C).
See “Message Center” in the Index for
further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275 F (135 C) or greater, the message
center will display a TRANS HOT...IDLE ENG warning
message. Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe
to do so. Set the parking brake, place the transmission
in PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the
transmission temperature falls below 260 F (127 C).
If the transmission continues to operate above
265 F (130 C), please contact your nearest dealer
or the GM Roadside Assistance Center.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above the normal
operating range, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to costly repairs
that may not be covered under your warranty.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on
a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
2-92
Low Traction Light (If Equipped)
If you have the Traction
Assist System, this light
will come on when the
system is limiting wheel
spin. See “Traction Assist
System” in the Index.
You may feel or hear the system working or notice a
lack of accelerator response, but this is normal.
The LOW TRACTION light also comes on briefly when
you turn your ignition to RUN. If the light doesn’t come
on then, the system may require service; have it fixed so
it will be there to tell you when the Traction Assist
System is active. Slippery road conditions may exist if
the LOW TRACTION light comes on, so adjust your
driving accordingly.
Traction Off Light (If Equipped)
If you have the Traction
Assist System, this light
should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition
to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if the system is turned off.
If the TRACTION OFF light stays on, or comes on
when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your
Traction Assist System and your vehicle may need
service. When this light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
2-93
The TRACTION OFF light may come on for the
following reasons:
If you turn the system off by pressing the TAS on/off
button the light will come on and stay on. To turn the
system back on, press the button again; the light
should go off.
If you move the shift lever to FIRST (1), the light
will come on and stay on to indicate that the Traction
Assist System is off. This is normal operation. To
turn the system back on, move the shift lever back to
a position other than FIRST (1); the light should go
off. See “Traction Assist System” in the Index.
The light will come on and stay on if the TAS automatic
engagement feature has been turned off. To turn the
system on, press the TAS off/on button; the light should
go off. To turn the automatic engagement feature back
on, see “Traction Assist System” in the Index.
If the Traction Assist System is affected by an
anti-lock brake system, Traction Assist System or
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the light will come on. Have your vehicle serviced.
If the vehicle is driven over an extremely rough road,
the system will turn off and the light will come on.
The light will go off a few seconds after the rough
road conditions go away or when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop. This is normal operation.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon Light in the United States or
Check Engine Light in Canada)
United States Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors
operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure
that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the
vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
2-94
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the
replacement of the original tires with other than
those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON
or CHECK ENGINE light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This
may also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
2-95
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A
few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See “Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected
by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-96
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or may
begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is
on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
United States Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by
a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as
possible. See “Check Eng Oil Pressure” and
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
2-97
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Cruise Light (If Equipped)
United States Canada
The CRUISE light comes on whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise Control” in the Index.
4WD Light (If Equipped)
The 4WD indicator will
light up when you shift a
manual transfer case into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting
is normal.
See “Four-Wheel Drive” in the Index for more information.
2-98
Tow/Haul Light
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
This message is displayed
when the tow/haul mode has
been activated.
For more information see, “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.
Fuel Gage
United States Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate E (Empty) before you are out
of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel
gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads F (Full).
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
The gage goes back to E (Empty) when you turn off
the ignition.
If you have a diesel engine, see “Fuel Gage” in the
Diesel Engine Supplement.
2-99
Message Center
The message center is located on the left side of the
instrument panel cluster. It gives you important safety
and maintenance facts. When you turn the ignition on,
the entire center lights up for just a few seconds.
As needed, the message center will display one of the
following messages. The message center is capable of
alternating among different messages if needed.
Battery
If this message is displayed
when the engine is running,
you may have a problem
with your charging system.
The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the message stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this message displayed could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this message
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and the air conditioner.
Trans Fluid Hot
If you have an automatic transmission, you have a
transmission temperature warning display contained in
the message center.
If the transmission fluid
temperature becomes high,
the message center will
display this message.
2-100
When the transmission enters the protection mode you
may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message
displayed, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered under your warranty.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on
a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
2-101
Trans Hot...Idle Engine
If you have an automatic transmission, you have a
transmission over-temperature display contained in
the message center.
If this warning message is
displayed, pull the vehicle
off the roadway when it is
safe to do so.
Set the parking brake and place the transmission in
PARK (P). Idle the engine until the message center no
longer displays a message. If idling the engine does not
turn the warning message off after 10 to 15 minutes,
contact your nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission TRANS HOT...IDLE ENGINE
message displayed, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to costly repairs
that may not be covered under your warranty.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on
a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
2-102
Low Coolant
This message is displayed
when the cooling system is
low on coolant.
The engine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can.
Check Coolant Temp
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets hot.
Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolant
level. See “Engine Coolant” and “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index for further information.
Engine Overheated
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot.
This message will be displayed after the air conditioning
system has automatically turned off for the engine
coolant protection mode. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index for further information.
Reduced Engine Power
(V8 Gasoline Engines Only)
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and
the engine further enters
the engine coolant
protection mode.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 8.1L engine, this
light may come on because of an electronic throttle
control system fault. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index for further information.
2-103
Check Eng Oil Pressure
This message is displayed
when the engine oil pressure
is low.
See “Oil Pressure Gage” in the Index for more information.
Check Eng Oil Level (Gasoline Engine)
This message is displayed
when the engine oil level
is low.
Once oil is added, it may need time to drain and settle in
the engine before this message will turn off. It is best to
let the engine cool down (if it is hot) or warm up (if it is
cold) and cycle the ignition to be sure this message turns
off. Refer to the dipstick for the correct level.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index on how to check the oil
level and for what type of oil to add.
Change Engine Oil
This message is displayed
when the engine oil needs to
be changed. The message
is only displayed for
15 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle.
When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the
Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil, When to
Change” in the Index.
Security
This message is
displayed when the content
theft-deterrent system has
been activated and
also monitors the
Passlock System.
If the security message is displayed continuously while
driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the
Passlock System. Your vehicle will not be protected by
Passlock, and you should see your GM dealer.
2-104
Service 4WD (If Equipped)
If the SERVICE 4WD
message comes on, there
may be a problem with the
automatic transfer case and
service is required.
Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent, which may prevent serious damage to
the vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your
service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
Low Washer Fluid
This message is displayed
when the vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid.
The message is only
displayed for 15 seconds
at the start of each
ignition cycle.
For more information see, “Windshield Washer Fluid” in
the Index.
Cargo Lamp On
This message is displayed
when the cargo lamp is
turned on and the ignition
key is turned to RUN.
Low Fuel
This message is displayed
when your vehicle is low
on fuel.
Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
3- 3-1
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2 Comfort Controls
3-2 Standard Comfort Controls
3-3 Heater and Air Conditioning Comfort
Controls (If Equipped)
3-5 Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
3-12 Air Conditioning
3-13 Heating
3-13 Defogging and Defrosting
3-13 Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
3-14 Ventilation System
3-16 Audio Systems
3-16 Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
3-16 Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and
MN Buttons
3-16 AM-FM Stereo
3-18 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
3-20 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3-25 AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
3-29 Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)
3-30 Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
3-32 Understanding Radio Reception
3-33 Tips About Your Audio System
3-34 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
3-35 Care of Your Compact Discs
3-35 Care of Your Compact Disc Player
3-35 Fixed Mast Antenna
3-2
Comfort Controls
Standard Comfort Controls
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the control panel adjusts the
fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise.
To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. To turn
the fan off, turn the knob to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer
air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area
for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
VENT: This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets.
BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
The air flow can be divided between VENT and
HEATER depending upon where the knob is placed
between the settings.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets, and the rest
of the air is divided between the windshield defroster
outlets and the side window defroster outlets.
BLEND: Airflow is delivered through the heater
floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the
side window defroster outlets. The air flow can be
divided between HEATER and DEFROST depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster
outlets and some through the heater outlets.
3-3
Heater and Air Conditioning Comfort
Controls (If Equipped)
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the control panel adjusts the
fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise.
To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. To turn
the fan off, turn the knob to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer
air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area
for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
PANEL: This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets and the center floor console
(if equipped).
BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the
instrument panel outlets and center floor console outlets
(if equipped) as well as the heater floor outlets. The air
flow can be divided between PANEL and HEATER
depending upon where the knob is placed between the
settings. Pressing the A/C button while in this mode
causes cooler air to come out of the instrument panel
outlets and center floor console outlets (if equipped)
and warmer air to come out of the heater floor outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets and center
floor console outlets (if equipped), as well as some
air through the windshield defroster outlets and side
window defroster outlets. If air from the center floor
console outlets is not desired, turn the vents off at
the console.
3-4
BLEND: Airflow is delivered through the heater
floor outlets, center floor console outlets (if equipped),
the windshield defroster outlets and the side window
defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided between
HEATER and DEFROST depending upon where
the knob is placed between the settings. The air
conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the
air to prevent window fogging.
DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air
through the windshield defroster outlets, side window
defroster outlets and some air through the heater outlets
and center floor console outlets (if equipped). If air from
the center floor console outlets is not desired or more
defroster performance is desired, turn the vents off at
the console. When in the DEFROST mode, the air
conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify the
air to prevent window fogging.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to direct
the system to use outside air.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to
limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle.
This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors
entering your vehicle or attempting to quickly cool
down the interior. Pressing RECIRCULATION will
recirculate air continuously.
RECIRCULATION is used when the fan control is OFF
to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering your
vehicle. All button lights will go off. The last setting
selected will activate when the blower is turned back on.
Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel
the OUTSIDE AIR button. To return to normal
operation and to prevent stale air, be sure to return
the OUTSIDE AIR.
Between HEATER and BLEND mode, outside air is forced
to reduce window fogging. If the RECIRCULATION
button is pressed, the LED indicator will flash three
times indicating that forced outside air is activated and
RECIRCULATION is not available.
3-5
The auto recirculation feature will activate when the
following are true:
the air conditioning system is activated,
the OUTSIDE AIR button is on, and
the vehicle load is high due to city traffic,
extended idling or hot weather.
The system will automatically switch to the recirculation
mode to lower the system load and improve interior
comfort. The OUTSIDE AIR and RECIRCULATION
button LEDs will not change. The system will return
to the OUTSIDE AIR function when the system load
is reduced.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside temperature drops below a level at which
air conditioning is ineffective.
Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
Fan Control
The knob on the left side of the electronic climate control
panel operates the fan speed. To manually increase
airflow, move the knob clockwise. To manually decrease
airflow, move it counterclockwise.
OFF: If the knob is in OFF, outside air will still enter
the vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob.
3-6
AUTO: If the knob is in AUTO, the fan speed will vary
as the system maintains the selected temperature.
When both the fan control and mode knobs are in the
AUTO position, the system will then automatically
maintain the desired cabin temperature as selected by
the temperature knob. Manual control of functions is
also available.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select
the desired air temperature in your vehicle. This knob
will allow you to adjust the interior air temperature
independent of the function knob setting. Move the
knob clockwise toward 82 for warmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise toward 66 for cooler air. When the
system is set for automatic operation, sensors will control
the fan/blower speed.
Full Hot: If you turn the temperature knob past 82 F
(28 C), the system will go into the “full hot” mode.
The system will remain at that maximum heating setting
and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to.
If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.
Full Cold: If you turn the temperature knob past 66 F
(19 C), the system will go into the “full cold” mode.
The system will remain at that maximum cooling setting
and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is set to.
If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.
Mode Knob -- Automatic Operation
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery. When the system is
set for automatic operation, sensors will control the air
delivery mode. Air will come primarily from the floor or
instrument panel outlets, with some air directed to the
windshield to prevent fogging.
When the system is in AUTO mode, the air conditioning
light will turn on, and the recirculation and outside
air lights turn off. With the system in full auto control
(both the fan and mode knobs in AUTO), you still
have the ability to override any function. However,
continually overriding the outside air or the A/C
compressor will limit the ability of the system to
cool the vehicle quickly.
If you push a button for a function which is not
available, the light next to that button will flash
three times to alert you that it’s not available.
To find your comfort zone, start with the 74 F (23 C)
setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to
adjust the temperature if necessary.
3-7
With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool the
air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need for
heat, the airflow will be directed out of the floor outlets.
As the interior temperature approaches a desired setting,
the blower speed will decrease. To maintain interior
comfort, the airflow will adjust between the instrument
panel air outlets and floor outlets. On bright sunny days
in cool weather, the airflow may come out of the air
conditioning and floor outlets (bi-level mode) to
maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air
temperature, engine coolant temperature or the time since
the engine was last started. As the coolant warms up, the
fan speed will gradually increase and air will flow from
the heater outlets, with some airflow to the windshield
to prevent fogging under most normal conditions.
Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor
located around the center of the instrument panel.
This sensor is used by the automatic system to
regulate temperature.
Mode Knob -- Manual Operation
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
You can choose to set the climate control system
yourself, or let the system work for you by placing the
system in AUTO mode. See “Mode Knob -- Automatic
Operation” earlier in this section.
PANEL: This setting directs most of the air
through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount
through the floor outlets.
BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some
air through the windshield defroster outlets.
BLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the
heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets.
The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify
the air to prevent window fogging.
3-8
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the
heater outlets. The air conditioning compressor may run
to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to force the
system to use outside air. Press it again to close off the
outside air.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This is
helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your
vehicle or attempting to quickly cool down the interior.
In the AUTO mode, the system will use recirculation
as necessary to cool the air. Pressing the recirculation
button will change the operation to a manual mode and
the air will recirculate non-stop. Press this button again
to turn off the recirculation feature.
RECIRCULATION may be selected with the fan control
in OFF to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering
your vehicle.
Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel the
OUTSIDE AIR button.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.
When in AUTO, the A/C is automatically engaged
when necessary.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside temperature drops below a level which
air conditioning is ineffective.
Remember that in order for the automatic system to perform
well, it needs A/C to provide cooling performance.
3-9
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has one of these systems, you can increase
and decrease the airflow at the rear vents. Depending on
the system you have and the setting selected, you can
send cooled or heated air to the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Air Conditioning (Without Rear Heater)
(If Equipped)
Front Control
To increase and decrease the flow of cooled air to the rear
vents, turn the rotary knob to the fan speed you want.
The knob has three speed positions. To increase the flow
of cooled air, turn the switch toward 3. To decrease the
flow of cooled air, turn it toward 1. To turn the fan off,
turn the knob to OFF.
To operate the rear system using the front control,
just turn the knob to select the fan speed.
Rear Control
To use the rear control, first turn the front control knob
to REAR. Then, the rear control can be used to increase
and decrease the airflow.
3-10
Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has the rear air conditioning and rear
heater system combination, controls are provided to
regulate temperature, location and speed of the airflow.
Front Control
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan control knob
located on the left side to the desired setting.
To activate the second seat control system, turn the fan
knob on the front overhead control to REAR.
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the right knob on
the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for floor vent
airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent airflow.
Generally, the upper vents are used for air conditioning
and the floor vents for heating. The knob can be set to
any blend setting.
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the center of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn the knob clockwise toward red.
For cooler air, turn the knob counterclockwise toward blue.
Rear Control
The rear control works just like the front control. It will
allow second seat passengers to adjust the controls as
they desire. To use the rear control, first turn the front
knob to REAR.
3-11
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems
with Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
Front Control
Rear Control
With this system the rear passengers can control the
temperature of the air flow for his/her own zones.
The climate control has three controls.
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan knob located on
the left side of the control panel to the desired fan speed.
The system also has a front AUTO setting that can
automatically change the temperature of the rear seating
area based on information from the front control.
An OFF setting, located on the front climate control
panel, also allows the driver to turn off the rear
passenger seat controls from the front seat.
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the center of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn the knob clockwise toward
82 F (28 C). Turn the knob counterclockwise
toward 66 F (19 C) for cooler air.
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the right knob on
the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for floor vent
airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent airflow.
Generally, the upper vents are used for air conditioning
and the floor vents for heating. The knob can be set to
any blend setting.
For rear control operation, use the above instructions.
3-12
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
air inside escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
The RECIRCULATION button allows the air inside
your vehicle to be recirculated. This setting helps to
maximize your air conditioner’s performance and
your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools air
the fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors
and/or dust from entering the vehicle. When using the
air conditioner, turn off the RECIRCULATION
button after the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior
temperature. When the right knob on the control panel
is between HEATER and DEFROST, the recirculation
feature will not function to reduce window fogging.
The A/C button, below the mode knob, allows the
air coming into your vehicle to be cooled. This setting
is useful for normal cooling on hot days.
When you use A/C with the RECIRCULATION button
pushed in, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle
reaches a comfortable interior temperature.
Maximum air conditioning performance is obtained by
pressing the A/C button, the RECIRCULATION button
and turning the temperature knob fully counterclockwise
to the blue area. This setting also cools air the fastest.
After the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable
temperature, press the OUTSIDE AIR button to
place the air conditioning system in the normal mode.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has air conditioning, it is equipped with
a passenger compartment air filter, which filters outside
air entering the vehicle. For information on replacing
the filter see “Passenger Compartment Air Filter” in
the Index.
3-13
Heating
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days, use the HEATER or
VENT/HEAT setting with the temperature knob in the
red area.
On cold days, approximately 32 F (-0C) or lower,
if your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission,
you may experience differences in how the transmission
shifts until the engine is warm. This feature automatically
reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal
operating temperature and shortens the time it takes the
heater to reach full output.
If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your
engine in cold weather, 20 F (-8C) or lower, the
heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the
passenger compartment.
The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the
time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating
temperature. For more information, see “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the
windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST to
remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely
humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the
temperature knob toward the red area and the fan
control turned all the way to the right.
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
If you see lines running across the rear window, you
have a rear window defogger. The lines warm the glass.
To turn on the rear window
defogger, press this button
next to the fan knob.
The rear window
defogger will only work
if the ignition is in RUN.
For best results, clear the
window of as much snow
or ice as possible.
3-14
The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes.
If you need additional warming time, press the button
again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by
pressing the button.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors,
the rear window defogger button will also activate the
heated outside mirrors.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Air will flow through the
instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air
to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving.
With the side windows closed, air will flow into the
front air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the
air exhaust valves.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater
or the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have
the RECIRCULATION button pushed in. For more
information on the RECIRCULATION button,
see “Air Conditioning” earlier in this section.
3-15
Your vehicle has air
outlets in the center and
on the sides of your
instrument panel.
You can turn the outlets from side-to-side or up
and down to direct the flow of air. The left driver
and passenger outlets on vehicles equipped with air
conditioning have shut off knobs. Turn the knob to the
left to shut off air flow or to the right to allow air flow.
When you close an outlet, it will increase the flow of air
coming out of any outlets that are open. The center
outlet does not completely shut off airflow.
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
The use of hood air deflectors may adversely
affect the performance of the heating and air
conditioning system.
3-16
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until
the correct hour appears on the display.
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR
and MN Buttons
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.
AM-FM Stereo
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio
on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between
AM and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
3-17
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and
press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of
each radio station. SCAN will light up on the display.
The radio will automatically SCAN to the next higher
station, play that station for a few seconds, then SCAN
to the next higher station. Press VOLUME or both
SEEK buttons to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the
same two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
3-18
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio
on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between
AM, FM1 and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons
let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1 and seven FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-19
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and
press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of your
preset stations. The system will scan through and play
each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop
scanning through the preset stations.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes
that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.
Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work
well in this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
reversing the tape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.
3-20
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop
the tape and play the radio.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape
Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
3. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and FWD
buttons at the same time for three seconds. The tape
symbol on the display will flash, showing that the
broken tape detection feature is no longer active.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of being turned continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
3-21
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release
the button. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return and the
tone you selected will be automatically selected
for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-22
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press
P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on
your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass
and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When the
TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-23
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press EJECT
or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape. If the ignition
is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you
do for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow
will be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side
of the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape
to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.
(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the
tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.
3-24
AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape
to the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is
in the active mode.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio will now play. EJECT can be used with
either the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape
with the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before
loading the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape
Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-25
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up
for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at
the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it
to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its
stored position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.
3-26
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting
you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release
the button. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return and the
tone you selected will be automatically selected
for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then
press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored
on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one
of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for
the location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass
and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When the
TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
3-27
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.
(You can also turn the system on when you insert a
compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the
disc should play. CD and a CD symbol will also
appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,
the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and try again.)
The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
3-28
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on
the disc in random order. While in the RDM mode,
RANDOM appears on the display. Press RDM again
to return to normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display.
Sound is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number
will also appear when a new track begins to play.
Press RECALL again to return to the time display.
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off,
the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at
the point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button.
To return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one.
If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more
than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in.
The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is
off, press this button to load a CD.
3-29
Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)
If you have an AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc
Automatic Tone Control System that includes a remote
cassette player, the cassette player is located in the
center of the instrument panel.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, first press
EJECT on the remote player. Then, insert the cassette
tape. The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio
is off.
Once the tape is playing, use the control knobs for VOL,
AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as
you do for the radio.
A lighted tape symbol shows when a cassette tape is in
the player. A lighted arrow will also appear and show the
direction of play when a tape is active.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
Anytime a cassette tape is inserted, the top side is
selected for play first.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow
(in the opposite direction that the lighted tape direction
arrow points) to search for the previous selection.
A minimum three-second blank gap is needed for the
player to stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape
direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation
and the sound is muted in this mode.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow
(in the direction that the lighted tape direction arrow
points) to search for the next selection. The tape
direction arrow will blink during SEEK operation and
the sound is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape.
The tape will rapidly reverse to the beginning of the
cassette reel or until you press REV again. The radio
plays the last selected station during REV.
3-30
(5): Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby NR on and off.
Dolby NR is active when a tape is inserted in the remote
cassette. The double-D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly advance the tape.
The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette
reel or until you press FWD again. The radio plays the
last selected station during FWD.
PROG: Press this button on the remote player to go
from one side of the tape to the other.
TAPE: Press the AM-FM button to switch from the
player and the radio when a tape is playing. To return to
the tape player, press CD AUX. The lighted arrow will
appear next to the symbol and show the direction of play
when a tape is active.
EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to
remove the tape. EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off. Also, you must press EJECT before
loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading.
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK
is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter
your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.
It is recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and
you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
3-31
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
The LED indicator by the volume control will begin
flashing when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with
the ignition on before you can try again. When you try
again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
3-32
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them
down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio
is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
3-33
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be
loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you
can add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-34
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears
on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your
cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected,
use the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3-35
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl.
4- 4-1
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions.
We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2 Defensive Driving
4-3 Drunken Driving
4-6 Control of a Vehicle
4-6 Braking
4-9 Traction Assist System (Option)
4-12 Steering
4-14 Off-Road Recovery
4-14 Passing
4-16 Loss of Control
4-17 Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
4-32 Driving at Night
4-33 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4-36 City Driving
4-37 Freeway Driving
4-38 Before Leaving on a Long Trip
4-39 Highway Hypnosis
4-39 Hill and Mountain Roads
4-41 Winter Driving
4-45 Recreational Vehicle Towing
4-47 Loading Your Vehicle
4-49 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment
4-55 Camper Wiring Harness (If Equipped)
4-56 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
4-56 Towing a Trailer
4-2
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to
brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this,
or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
4-3
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-4
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-5
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
4-6
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-7
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.
If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light”
in the Index.
4-8
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-9
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Traction Assist System (Option)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
This light will come
on when the TAS is
limiting wheel spin.
See “Low Traction Light”
in the Index.
You may hear or feel the system working or notice a
lack of accelerator response, but this is normal.
4-10
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal and
doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration
in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of the
transmission or driving on rough roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
See “Cruise Control” in the Index.
When the TRACTION
OFF light is on, the TAS
is off and will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
The TRACTION OFF light will come on under the
following conditions:
The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off the
automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
The vehicle is driven on a severely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will be
on again. This is normal.
A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System
or engine-related problem has been detected and the
vehicle needs service.
See “Traction Off Light” in the Index.
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, you should always leave the system on.
But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to.
You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.
4-11
To turn the system on
or off press the TAS
on/off button located
to the left of the of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
If you used the button to turn the system off, the
TRACTION OFF light will come on and stay on. You
can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the
button again. The TRACTION OFF light should go off.
If desired, you can change the TAS automatic
engagement feature so that the system will not come
on automatically when the engine is started. To do so:
1. Park vehicle with ignition off and transmission
in PARK (P).
2. Turn the ignition to RUN; do not start the engine.
3. Apply the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal to
the floor and then press the TAS on/off button and
hold it down for at least six seconds.
4. Release the TAS button and both pedals.
5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the TAS is
set to come on automatically or not, you can always turn
the system on or off by pressing the TAS on/off button.
4-12
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Speed-Sensitive Steering
This system varies the amount of steering effort
proportionate to your vehicle speed. Steering is easier
at lower speeds for maneuvering and parking ease.
As your vehicle speed increases, the steering effort also
increases. At highway speeds, the amount of steering
effort is increased.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-13
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-14
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to
pass (providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross
a solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
4-15
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back
a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
if your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle
you just passed may seem to be farther away from
you than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
4-16
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens
when the three control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-17
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you
shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can easily remove the
front bumper lower air dam.
The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a
series of push pins located around the lower edge of
the front bumper. The push-pins are accessible from
underneath the front bumper.
4-18
The following steps must be performed on each of the
push-pins to remove the air dam:
1. Insert the tip portion of a
flat-tip screwdriver into
the push-pin slot and
pull downward until the
push-pin snaps loose.
2. While continuing to
pull downward on the
push-pin, squeeze and
turn the expandable
end of the push-pin
with a pair of pliers
until it releases from
the retainer.
3. Pull the push-pins and
lower air dam assembly
away from the retainers
until the lower air dam
is free.
When you’re back on roads, though, be sure to replace
the air dam.
NOTICE:
Operating your vehicle for extended periods
without the front bumper lower air dam installed
can cause improper air flow to the engine and
may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks
on the front of your vehicle to be damaged.
Always be sure to replace the front bumper
air dam when you’re finished off-road driving.
4-19
To replace the lower air dam, do the following:
1. Line up each push-pin
with its intended retainer
and push the washer
portion of the push-pin
towards the retainer until
it locks into place.
2. Push the flat end of the
push-pin towards the
retainer until it locks
into place, making sure
each is secure.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary
maintenance and service work done. Check to make
sure all underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the
fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local
laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving?
If you don’t know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
4-20
CAUTION:
Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward during
a sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of
the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be struck
by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo
in the cargo area as far forward and low
as possible.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting the environment:
Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-21
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them,
the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control
your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some
things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:
you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
you have less time to react.
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
4-22
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer
braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you
if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
Is the path ahead clear?
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)
Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.
4-23
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top.
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near
the top, but you may not see this because the crest of
the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment,
a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you
don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-24
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning
or sliding.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways,
and possibly roll over. You could be seriously
injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top
of the hill.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you’re there.
Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.
CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.
You could be seriously injured or killed. As you
near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
4-25
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need
to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your
vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in REVERSE (R).
As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best
that you back down the hill with your wheels straight
rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the
wheel too far to the left or right will increase the
possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the
engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t
work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly
and you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough
to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you
to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it
up the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
4-26
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just can’t do it.
What should I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission
in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual
transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is
because the NEUTRAL position on the
transfer case overrides the transmission.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
You or someone else could be injured. If you
are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking
brake and shift the transmission to PARK (P)
(or, put your manual transmission in FIRST (1)).
But do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Leave the transfer case in the 2 Wheel High,
4 High or 4 Low position.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
4-27
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a
hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed
under control.
Q: Are there some things I should not do
when driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you
ignore them you could lose control and have
a serious accident.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal
pressed down in a manual shift. This is called
“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do
all the work and could overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It’s much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the
manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
4-28
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:
A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go straight
up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base
(the distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across
an incline, the much more narrow track width
(the distance between the left and right wheels) may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, don’t
drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-29
Q: What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the
path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
4-30
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.
CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice.
Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you
and your passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.
4-31
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that when
your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown.
If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away
the ground from under your tires, and you could
lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations
can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
4-32
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
4-33
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-34
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and
keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid.
Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show
signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
4-35
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water, water can come in through
your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and the other vehicle occupants
could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs,
and otherwise be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just
your parking lamps -- to help make you more visible
to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See “Tires” in the Index.
4-36
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out
for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that
have not cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
4-37
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at
the same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic
flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
4-38
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-39
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-40
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning
to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips
safer and more enjoyable. See “Off-Road Driving” in the
Index for information about driving off-road.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and
transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing
or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-41
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be very careful.
4-42
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32 F; 0 C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
’If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-43
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-44
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it
keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged
battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling
later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for
a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
4-45
Recreational Vehicle Towing
There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle
behind another vehicle for use at your destination.
Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed
for recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions
for the towing equipment.
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to OFF. To
prevent your battery from draining while towing, remove
the IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse block.
Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach your destination.
See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive vehicles, should not be towed
with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all
four wheels off the ground.
In rare cases when it’s unavoidable that a
two-wheel-drive vehicle is to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground, the propeller shaft to axle yoke
orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft
removed following the applicable service manual
removal/installation procedure.
Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission
through the opening created by removing the propeller
shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check
the transmission fluid level before driving the truck.
4-46
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission,
or if your vehicle is in gear, for a manual
transmission. You or others could be injured.
Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before
you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to correctly tow your
vehicle on all four wheels:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Shift an automatic transmission to PARK (P),
or a manual transmission to FIRST (1).
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
4. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N).
See “Four-Wheel Drive” in the Index for the
proper procedure to select the neutral position for
your vehicle.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position unlocks
the steering column and reduces battery drain as long
as the IGN 0 fuse is removed. Unlocking the steering
column will allow the proper movement of the front
wheels and tires during towing.
4-47
Loading Your Vehicle
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document
in the cab.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains information
about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “Front
Axle Reserve Capacity” later in this section.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
CAUTION:
In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things
carried in the bed of your truck could shift
forward and come into the passenger area,
injuring you and others. If you put things in
the bed of your truck, you should make sure
they are properly secured.
4-48
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
This will help you decide how much cargo and installed
equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.
4-49
Adding a Snow Plow or
Similar Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are
some things you’ll need to know:
NOTICE:
If your vehicle doesn’t have the snow plow prep
package, adding a plow can damage your vehicle,
and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by warranty.
Unless your vehicle was built to carry a snow
plow, don’t add one to your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the snow plow option called
RPO VYU (snow plow prep package), then the
payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced
when a snow plow is installed. Your vehicle can
be damaged if either the front or rear axle
ratings, or the GVW, are exceeded.
Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle a
snow plow?
A: Some vehicles are built with a special package,
called RPO VYU (snow plow prep package).
If your vehicle has this option, you can add a
plow to it, provided certain weights, such as the
weights on the vehicle’s axles and the GVW,
aren’t exceeded.
Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be?
A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many
things, such as:
The options your vehicle came with, and the weight
of those options,
The weight and number of passengers you intend
to carry,
The weight of items you’ve added to your vehicle,
like a tool box or truck cap,
4-50
The total weight of any additional cargo you intend
to carry.
Say, for example, you have a 700 lb. (318 kg) snow
plow. The total weight of all occupants and cargo
inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb. (135 kg).
This means that you may only be able to carry
one passenger. But, even this may be too much if
you’ve got other equipment already adding to the
weight of your vehicle.
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a
snow plow on your vehicle:
Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles
doesn’t exceed the axle rating for each.
For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers
must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be
installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast must
be properly secured so it won’t move during driving.
Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding rear ballast.
Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper
front and rear weight distribution ratio, even
though the actual weight at the front axle may be
less than the front axle rating.
The snow plow manufacturer or installer can
assist you in determining the amount of rear ballast
required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the
front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear
weight distribution ratio.
The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
4-51
Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and how
do I calculate it?
A: Front axle reserve capacity is the difference
between your front GAWR and the front axle
weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers.
Basically, it’s the amount of weight you can add to
your front axle before reaching your front GAWR.
The front axle reserve
capacity for your
vehicle can be
found in the lower
right corner of the
tire/certification label.
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front
accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the
front axle, use the following formula:
(W x (A + W.B))/W.B.= Weight the accessory is
adding to the front axle.
Where:
W=Weight of added accessory
A=Distance that the accessory is in front of the
A=front axle
W.B.=Vehicle Wheelbase
4-52
For example, adding a 700 lb. (318 kg) snow plow
actually adds more than 700 lb. (318 kg) to the
front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is
4 ft. (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the
wheel base is 10 ft. (305 cm), then:
W=700 lb. (318 kg)
A=4 ft. (122 cm)
W.B.=10 ft. (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B.= (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =
980 lb. (445 kg)
So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is
more than 980 lb. (445 kg), you could add this
snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR.
Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment to
my vehicle?
A: You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo more
towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the
load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear
GAWR and the GVWR must never be exceeded.
CAUTION:
On some vehicles equipped with certain front
mounted equipment, such as a snow plow, it may
be possible to load the front axle to the front
GAWR but not have enough weight on the rear
axle to have proper braking performance.
If your brakes can’t work properly, you could
have a crash. To help your brakes work properly
when a snow plow is installed, always follow
the snow plow manufacturer or installer’s
recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a
proper front and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual front weight may be less
than the front GAWR, and the total vehicle
weight is less than the GVWR. Maintaining a
proper front and rear weight distribution ratio is
necessary to provide proper braking performance.
4-53
Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity?
A: This is the difference between your GVWR and the
weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers.
It’s the amount of weight you can add to your
vehicle before reaching your GVWR.
Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are
intended as a guide when selecting the amount of
equipment or cargo your truck can carry. If you
are unsure of your truck’s front, rear or total
weight, go to a weight station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can also help you with this.
See your dealer for additional advice and information
about using a snow plow on your vehicle. Also, see
“Loading Your Vehicle” earlier in this section.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
This label is inside your glove box. It will tell you if
your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a
load your vehicle can carry, and how to correctly spread
out your load. Also, it will help you match the right
slide-in camper to your vehicle.
When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load
of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, plus
everything else added to the camper after it left
the factory,
everything in the camper and
all the people inside.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include the weight of the people inside. But, you can
figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
4-54
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information label
in glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the
following illustration.
Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement
purposes. The recommended location for the cargo center
of gravity is at point C for the CWR. It is the point where
the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at
that point, would balance the front and rear.
Here is an example of proper truck and camper match:
A. Camper Center of Gravity
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the
center of gravity zone for your vehicle’s cargo load.
You must weigh any accessories or other equipment
that you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra
weight from the CWR. This extra weight may shorten
the center of gravity zone of your vehicle. Your dealer
can help you with this.
If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less than
the CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle
may be larger.
4-55
Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle-camper
match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR.
After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper, drive to
a weigh station and weigh the front and rear wheels
separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles.
The loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more
than either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads
should not be more than the GVWR.
Open your driver’s door and look at the
Certification/Tire label to find out your GAWR
and GVWR.
If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, move or
take out some things until all the weight falls below
the ratings. Of course, you should always tie down
any loose items when you load your vehicle or camper.
When you install and load your slide-in camper,
check the manufacturer’s instructions.
If you want more information on curb weights, cargo
weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the correct center of
gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealer can help you.
Just ask for a copy of “Consumer Information,
Truck-Camper Loading.”
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR
for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer
attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or
GAWR. If you are using a weight-distributing hitch,
weigh the vehicle without the equalizer bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see “Trailer Towing” in
the Index.
Camper Wiring Harness
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a camper wiring
harness, see “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index
for further information.
4-56
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners
may consider having the pickup box removed and a
commercial or recreational body installed. Before you
do so, first contact the GM Customer Assistance
Office for your area for information on such conversions
specific to this vehicle. See the “Warranty and Owner
Assistance” booklet for Customer Assistance Office.
Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there
are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup
with the box removed which may affect vehicle safety.
The components necessary to adapt a pickup to permit
its safe use with a specialized body should be installed
by a body builder in accordance with the information
available from the Customer Assistance Office.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the brakes may not work well -- or even at all.
You and your passengers could be seriously
injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed
all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-57
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle. Additional rear rear axle
maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow
a trailer. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”
in the Index.
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of your passengers. So
please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh less than the capacity stamped on your step
bumper. You should always use a sway control
if your trailer will weigh more than the capacity
stamped on your step bumper. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
4-58
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
If you have an automatic transmission, you can
tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
If you have a manual transmission and you are
towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5)
gear. Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you
need to, a lower gear). See “Tow/Haul Mode”
in the Index.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode (If Equipped)
Tow/haul is a feature on automatic transmission
equipped vehicles that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
tow/haul mode is to:
Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer
or a large or heavy load.
Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the
vehicle is unloaded.
Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
Automatic transmission equipped vehicles are provided
with a button at the end of the shift lever which when
pressed enables tow/haul. When the button is pressed,
a light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate
that tow/haul has been selected. Tow/haul may be turned
off by pressing the button again, at which time the
indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off.
The vehicle will automatically turn off tow/haul every
time it is started.
4-59
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of
the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
Tow/haul is most useful under the following
driving conditions:
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/haul is recommended only when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
Above the 5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg) trailer rating, the
handling/trailering suspension is required on C-1500
models and the handling/trailering or off-road
suspension is required on K-1500 models. The engine
oil cooler is required on C/K-2500 models with the
VORTEC 6000 engine. Refer to the Trailering Guide
for oil cooler recommendations.
4-60
C-1500 Regular Cab Short Box (2WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4300 V6 (Auto) 3.08 4,700 lbs. (2 132 kg)
3.42 5,200 lbs. (2 359 kg)
4300 V6 (Manual) 3.08 3,700 lbs. (1 678 kg)
3.42 4,200 lbs. (1 905 kg)
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.42 6,600 lbs. (2 994 kg)
3.73 7,600 lbs. (3 447 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42 4,600 lbs. (2 087 kg)
3.73 5,600 lbs. (2 540 kg)
5300 V8 3.42 7,600 lbs. (3 447 kg)
3.73 8,600 lbs. (3 901 kg)
C-1500 Extended Cab Short Box (2WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4300 V6 (Auto) 3.42 4,900 lbs. (2 223 kg)
3.73 5,900 lbs. (2 676 kg)
4300 V6 (Manual) 3.42 3,900 lbs. (1 769 kg)
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.42 6,300 lbs. (2 858 kg)
3.73 7,300 lbs. (3 311 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42 4,300 lbs. (1 950 kg)
3.73 5,300 lbs. (2 404 kg)
5300 V8 3.42 7,300 lbs. (3 311 kg)
3.73 8,300 lbs. (3 765 kg)
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,000 lb. (454 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 1,500 lb. (680 kg) maximum.
4-61
C-1500 Crew Cab Short Box (2WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 3.73 8,300 lbs. (3 765 kg)
4.10 10,300 lbs. (4 672 kg)
C-1500 Regular Cab Long Box (2WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4300 V6 (Auto) 3.08 4,600 lbs. (2 087 kg)
3.42 5,100 lbs. (2 313 kg)
4300 V6 (Manual) 3.08 3,600 lbs. (1 633 kg)
3.42 4,100 lbs. (1 860 kg)
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.42 6,500 lbs. (2 948 kg)
3.73 7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42 4,500 lbs. (2 041 kg)
3.73 5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
5300 V8 3.42 7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
3.73 8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
C-1500 Extended Cab Long Box (2WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.42 6,100 lbs. (2 767 kg)
3.73 7,100 lbs. (3 220 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42 4,100 lbs. (1 860 kg)
3.73 5,100 lbs. (2 313 kg)
5300 V8 3.42 7,100 lbs. (3 220 kg)
3.73 8,100 lbs. (3 674 kg)
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,000 lb. (454 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 1,500 lb. (680 kg) maximum.
4-62
K-1500 Regular Cab Short Box (4WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4300 V6 (Auto) 3.42 4,900 lbs. (2 223 kg)
3.73 5,400 lbs. (2 449 kg)
4300 V6 (Manual) 3.42 3,900 lbs. (1 769 kg)
3.73 4,400 lbs. (1 996 kg)
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.73 7,300 lbs. (3 311 kg)
4.10 8,300 lbs. (3 765 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.73 5,300 lbs. (2 404 kg)
4.10 6,300 lbs. (2 858 kg)
5300 V8 3.73 8,300 lbs. (3 765 kg)
4.10 9,300 lbs. (4 218 kg)
K-1500 Extended Cab Short Box (4WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.73 7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.73 5,000 lbs. (2 268 kg)
4.10 6,000 lbs. (2 624 kg)
5300 V8 3.73 8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg)
4.10 9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
K-1500 Crew Cab Short Box (4WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 3.73 8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg)
4.10 10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,000 lb. (454 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 1,500 lb. (680 kg) maximum.
4-63
K-1500 Regular Cab Long Box (4WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4300 V6 (Auto) 3.42 4,800 lbs. (2 177 kg)
3.73 5,300 lbs. (2 404 kg)
4300 V6 (Manual) 3.42 3,800 lbs. (1 724 kg)
3.73 4,300 lbs. (1 950 kg)
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.73 7,200 lbs. (3 266 kg)
4.10 8,200 lbs. (3 719 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.73 5,200 lbs. (2 359 kg)
4.10 6,200 lbs. (2 812 kg)
5300 V8 3.73 8,200 lbs. (3 719 kg)
4.10 9,200 lbs. (4 173 kg)
K-1500 Extended Cab Long Box (4WD)*
Engine (Trans.) Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
4800 V8 (Auto) 3.73 6,800 lbs. (3 084 kg)
4.10 7,800 lbs. (3 538 kg)
4800 V8 (Manual) 3.73 4,800 lbs. (2 177 kg)
4.10 5,800 lbs. (2 631 kg)
5300 V8 3.73 7,800 lbs. (3 538 kg)
4.10 8,800 lbs. (3 992 kg)
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,000 lb. (454 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 1,500 lb. (680 kg) maximum.
4-64
C-2500 (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 3.73 8,800 lbs. (3 992 kg)
4.10 10,800 lbs. (4 899 kg)
C-2500 Regular Cab Long Box HD (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,600 lbs. (3 402 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,900 lbs. (6 311 kg)**
4.10 15,900 lbs. (7 212 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,900 lbs. (7 212 kg)**
4.10 15,900 lbs. (7 212 kg)**
C-2500 Extended Cab Short Box HD (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,800 lbs. (6 260 kg)**
4.10 15,800 lbs. (7 167 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,700 lbs. (7 121 kg)**
4.10 15,700 lbs. (7 121 kg)**
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 2,500 lb. (1 134 kg) maximum.
** Fifth-wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg) maximum.
4-65
C-2500 Extended Cab Long Box HD (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,200 lbs. (4 627 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,400 lbs. (6 078 kg)**
4.10 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 14,900 lbs. (6 758 kg)**
4.10 14,900 lbs. (6 758 kg)**
C-2500 Crew Cab Short Box HD (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,300 lbs. (4 672 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,600 lbs. (6 169 kg)**
4.10 15,600 lbs. (7 076 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
4.10 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 2,500 lb. (1 134 kg) maximum.
** Fifth-wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg) maximum.
4-66
C-2500 Crew Cab Long Box HD (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,200 lbs. (4 627 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,500 lbs. (6 123 kg)**
4.10 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 14,900 lbs. (6 758 kg)**
4.10 14,900 lbs. (6 758 kg)**
K-2500 Extended Cab Short Box (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 3.73 8,300 lbs. (3 765 kg)
4.10 10,300 lbs. (4 672 kg)
K-2500 Extended Cab Short Box HD (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,200 lbs. (4 627 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,500 lbs. (6 123 kg)**
4.10 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
4.10 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 2,500 lb. (1 134 kg) maximum.
** Fifth-wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg) maximum.
4-67
K-2500 Regular Cab Long Box HD (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,400 lbs. (4 717 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,700 lbs. (6 214 kg)**
4.10 15,700 lbs. (7 121 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,600 lbs. (7 076 kg)**
4.10 15,600 lbs. (7 076 kg)**
K-2500 Extended Cab Long Box HD (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,200 lbs. (4 627 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,500 lbs. (6 123 kg)**
4.10 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
4.10 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 2,500 lb. (1 134 kg) maximum.
** Fifth-wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg) maximum.
4-68
K-2500 Crew Cab Short Box HD (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,200 lbs. (5 987 kg)**
4.10 15,200 lbs. (6 895 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,200 lbs. (6 895 kg)**
4.10 15,200 lbs. (6 895 kg)**
K-2500 Crew Cab Long Box HD (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 9,900 lbs. (4 491 kg)
8100 V8 3.73 13,200 lbs. (5 987 kg)**
4.10 15,200 lbs. (6 895 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,100 lbs. (6 849 kg)**
4.10 15,100 lbs. (6 849 kg)**
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 2,500 lb. (1 134 kg) maximum.
** Fifth-wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg) maximum.
4-69
C-3500 Regular Cab HD (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,400 lbs. (4 717 kg)
8100 V8 4.10 15,700 lbs. (7 121 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,800 lbs. (7 167 kg)**
4.10 15,800 lbs. (7 167 kg)**
C-3500 Extended Cab (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,100 lbs. (4 581 kg)
8100 V8 4.10 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
C-3500 Crew Cab (2WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 9,900 lbs. (4 491 kg)
8100 V8 4.10 15,300 lbs. (6 940 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
4.10 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
K-3500 Regular Cab (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 10,100 lbs. (4 582 kg)
8100 V8 4.10 15,500 lbs. (7 031 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
4.10 15,400 lbs. (6 985 kg)**
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 2,500 lb. (1 134 kg) maximum.
** Fifth-wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg) maximum.
4-70
K-3500 Extended Cab (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 9,800 lbs. (4 445 kg)
8100 V8 4.10 15,100 lbs. (6 849 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 14,800 lbs. (6 713 kg)**
4.10 14,800 lbs. (6 713 kg)**
K-3500 Crew Cab (4WD)*
Engine Axle
Ratio
Max. Trailer Wt.
6000 V8 4.10 9,800 lbs. (4 445 kg)
8100 V8 4.10 15,100 lbs. (6 849 kg)**
6600 V8 Diesel 3.73 15,200 lbs. (6 895 kg)**
4.10 15,200 lbs. (6 895 kg)**
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15% of trailer weight 1,200 lb. (544 kg) maximum.
Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15% to 25% of trailer weight 2,500 lb. (1 134 kg) maximum.
** Fifth-wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg) maximum.
4-71
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or
gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will
be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer,
you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-72
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you
don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper
could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you
have ample room when turning to avoid contact
between the trailer and the bumper.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than the capacity stamped on your
step bumper, be sure to use a properly mounted,
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the
proper size. This equipment is very important for
proper vehicle loading and good handling when
you’re driving.
4-73
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from the
hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided
by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
For trailers up to 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) you may
attach the safety chains to the attaching points on the
bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the trailer or hitch
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can
turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to
the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel
of handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
4-74
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods
of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become very
warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed that might be
affected by high ambient temperatures.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move
your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
4-75
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow in
DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the transmission
to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if
the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads
and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in
the Index.
If you have a 5-speed manual transmission and you are
towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear.
Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to,
a lower gear).
If you have a 6-speed manual transmission and you
are towing a trailer, it’s better not to use SIXTH (6)
gear. Drive in FIFTH (5) gear (or, as you need to,
a lower gear).
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the
manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake
applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off.
If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
4-76
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet for an automatic transmission,
or into gear for a manual transmission.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an
automatic transmission, or REVERSE (R) for a
manual transmission.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL (N).
6. Release the regular brakes.
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the
steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not
in NEUTRAL.
4-77
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid
(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling
system and brake system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following
wiring harnesses for towing a trailer or hauling a
slide-in camper.
Basic Trailer Wiring Package
All regular, extended cab crew cab pickups have a
six-wire trailer towing harness.
The six-wire harness is located at the rear of the vehicle
and is tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harness requires
the installation of a trailer-wiring harness connector,
which is available through your dealer.
4-78
The six-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Light Blue: Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
If you need to upgrade your vehicle to heavy-duty
trailering, a brake controller harness and an underbody
harness with a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer
connector are available from your dealer.
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package (If Equipped)
Your pickup may be equipped with the eight-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket on
the platform hitch.*
* The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire
is tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with a
trailer, slide-in camper or cap.
4-79
The eight-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Light Blue: CHMSL
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller
and a trailer battery feed fuse are included with this
trailering package. (See “Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Package
(If Equipped)
The eight-wire camper harness is located under the
front edge of the pickup box on the driver’s side of the
vehicle, attached to the frame bracket. A connector will
have to be added to the wiring harness which connects
to the camper.
The eight-wire harness contains the following
camper/trailer circuits:
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Light Blue: Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller
and a trailer battery feed fuse are included with this
trailering package. (See “Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.)
4-80
If your vehicle is equipped with the “Heavy-Duty
Trailering” option, please refer to “Heavy-Duty Trailer
Wiring Package”, earlier in this section.
When the camper-wiring harness is ordered without the
heavy-duty trailering package, an eight-wire harness
with a seven-pin connector and separate CHMSL
connector are located at the rear of the vehicle and are
tied to the vehicle’s frame.
Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness
This harness is included with the heavy-duty and
camper/fifth-wheel trailer wiring packages. The harness
is for an electric trailer brake controller and includes a
trailer battery feed fuse. This harness and fuse should be
installed by your dealer or a qualified service center.
4-81
Auxiliary Battery (If Equipped)
The auxiliary battery provision can be used to supply
electrical power to additional equipment that you may
choose to add, such as a slide-in camper.
If your vehicle has this
provision, this relay will be
located on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle, next to
the auxiliary battery.
When using this provision, connection should only be
made to the upper stud (A) of the relay. Do not make
connections to the lower stud (B) of the relay.
The auxiliary battery circuit is protected by a megafuse
located behind the auxiliary battery.
Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions that
are included with any electrical equipment that you install.
NOTICE:
When using the auxiliary battery provision, the
electrical load must not exceed 30 amps. Always
turn off any electrical equipment when not in use.
Leaving electrical equipment on for extended
periods will drain your battery.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
NOTICE:
Using a power winch with the transmission in
gear may damage the transmission. When
operating a power winch, always leave the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block
the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling.
4-82
Power Take-Off (PTO) (If Equipped)
NOTICE:
If you have a PTO that will exceed 35 hp installed on
your vehicle, it could damage the transfer case or
transmission. When having a PTO installed on your
vehicle, make sure that it will not exceed 35 hp.
Before using a PTO, refer to the manufacturer’s or
installer’s instructions.
NOTICE:
Using a PTO while operating in one place before
the vehicle has reached normal operating
temperature can damage the transfer case or
transmission. If you will be using the PTO while
operating in one place, drive and warm up the
vehicle before using the PTO.
To engage a PTO on a vehicle with a
manual transmission:
1. Hold the clutch pedal down.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
4. Engage the PTO. Refer to the manufacturer’s
or installer’s for instructions on electrically
engaged PTOs.
5. For mobile operations, shift the transmission into
the gear you want, apply the regular brakes and
release the parking brake. For stationary operations,
leave the parking brake applied.
6. Release the clutch and regular brakes as you
normally would. When the clutch is released,
the PTO will start.
7. Turn the PTO rotary switch to ON.
To engage a PTO on a vehicle with an
automatic transmission:
1. Engine speed must be less than 1000 rpm.
2. Turn the PTO rotary switch ON.
4-83
Using PTO speed control in Preset Mode
(Factory Setting):
1. Engage the PTO.
2. Select PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) range.
Apply the parking brake in NEUTRAL (N) is
selected. Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) lockup is
not available in NEUTRAL (N) and is available only
in PARK when engine speed is above 1100 rpm.
3. Make sure your foot is off the brake pedal
(and off the clutch on vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission). Select the desired engine
speed for PTO operation. Please read the following
Preset Mode information regarding operation.
Preset Mode: PTO speed control mode is used for
stationary applications. This mode provides a default
standby speed of 800 or 850 rpm (depending on the
engine/transmission combination) and two default PTO
control speeds which follow:
PTO Fast Idle Speed of 1250 rpm, or
PTO Fast Idle Resume Speed of 1700 rpm.
Standby speed (800/850 rpm) is not to be used as a
PTO control speed. Vehicles not equipped with cruise
control will not have the resume speed capability.
Using PTO speed control in Variable Mode (Mobile):
1. Engage the PTO.
2. Vehicle speed must be greater than 5 mph for vehicles
equipped with gasoline engines or greater than 0 mph
for vehicles equipped with diesel engines.
3. Make sure your foot is off the brake pedal
(and off the clutch for vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission).
4. Select the desired engine speed (with the foot pedal)
and select SET on the PTO switch or with the
cruise control.
Using PTO speed control in Variable
Mode (Stationary):
1. Engage the PTO.
2. Vehicle speed must be less than 5 mph for vehicles
equipped with gasoline engines or at 0 mph for
vehicles equipped with diesel engines.
3. Make sure your foot is off the brake pedal
(and off the clutch for vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission).
4. Select the desired engine speed (with the foot pedal)
and select SET on the PTO switch or with the
cruise control.
4-84
Variable Mode: PTO speed control mode can be used
for both stationary and mobile applications. This mode
allows PTO to be controlled in a fashion similar to how
cruise control sets vehicle speed. The operator can set to
an rpm (between 800 and 2200) with the cruise control
feature or with the SET position on the PTO switch.
The operator is then able to increase engine speed in
100 rpm increments with the resume position on the
cruise control. The operator can also decrease engine
speed in 100 rpm increments with either the SET
position on the cruise control or the PTO switch.
Vehicles not equipped with cruise control will not
have the resume capability.
All engine speed values listed above are factory preset
values. With the exception of the TCC lockup speed
(1100 rpm) and the “tap” increment (100 rpm), all of
these values are programmable and can be adjusted by
your GM dealer or body upfitter. If the PTO software
settings do not match the settings shown here, then
they may have already been altered in order to satisfy
the requirements of the installed PTO system and
body equipment.
Step-Bumper Pad
If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may be
equipped with a rear step pad at the center of
the bumper.
If you will be using the
bumper to tow a trailer,
you must remove the
center cutout circle to
install the trailer ball.
5- 5-1
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2 Hazard Warning Flashers
5-2 Other Warning Devices
5-3 Jump Starting
5-8 Towing Your Vehicle
5-8 Engine Overheating (Gasoline Engine)
5-11 Cooling System (Gasoline Engine)
5-18 Engine Fan Noise
5-18 If a Tire Goes Flat
5-19 Changing a Flat Tire
5-34 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press the button located
at the top of the steering
column all the way down
to make your front and
rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the
first click and release.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
5-3
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump
start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear
or light yellow. Replace the battery when there
is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-4
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in
PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition,
it could save your radio!
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (-) jump starting
terminal. The remote positive (+) terminal is located
behind a red plastic cover near the engine accessory
drive bracket. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
On all V8 gasoline and diesel engines, the remote
negative (-) terminal is located on the engine
accessory drive bracket. This is marked “GND” on
V8 engines. On V6 engines, the remote negative (-)
terminal is located on a tab attached to the engine
accessory drive bracket where it is marked “GND”.
You should always use the remote positive (+)
and the remote negative (-) terminals instead of
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
your battery.
5-5
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelco battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or a remote positive terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or a remote negative
terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t connect
positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short that
would damage the battery and maybe other parts too.
On vehicles equipped with dual batteries, make all
battery connections to the remote positive (+) and
remote negative (-) terminals.
5-6
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) cable.
Use a remote
negative (-) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery or to a
remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-7
V8 Engine V6 Engine,
Diesel Similar
9. When connecting the cable, be sure it is not near
any engine parts that will move.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-8
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle
that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the
good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. In addition,
you will find a LOW COOLANT, CHECK COOLANT
TEMP, ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED
ENGINE POWER message in the message center on the
instrument panel. See “Message Center” in the Index.
Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode (V8 Engines Only)
Should an overheated engine condition exist and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and
engine performance. This operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.
Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset
the oil life monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
5-9
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
5-10
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) for automatic transmissions.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-11
Cooling System (Gasoline Engine)
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
8100 V8 Engines
All Other Engines
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-12
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
When the engine is cold,
the coolant level should
be at or above the FILL
COLD mark. If it isn’t,
you may have a leak in
the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.
5-13
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge
Tank --Gasoline Engines
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at or above the FILL COLD mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index
for more information.
5-14
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-15
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
So use the recommended coolant.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-16
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one full turn. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FILL COLD mark.
5-17
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FILL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight.
5-18
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-19
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-20
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Regular Cab
Extended and Crew Cab
The equipment you’ll need is behind the passenger’s
seat. For Extended and Crew Cab models, the equipment
is under the passenger’s side second row seat.
5-21
1. If there is a cover, move the seats forward and
turn the wing nut on the cover counterclockwise to
remove it. For Crew Cab models, pull up the second
row seat with the loop at the base of the seat cushion
to access the tools.
2. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can be
removed by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. To release the bottle jack from its holder, turn the
knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise to lower
the jack head slightly.
4. There is also a wing nut used to retain the
storage bag and tools. To remove it, turn the
wing nut counterclockwise.
You’ll use the jack handle and the wheel wrench to
remove the underbody-mounted spare tire. A. Hoist Assembly
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
F. Spare Tire
G. Tire Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
I. Hoist Lock
J. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
K. Hoist End
5-22
Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock,
open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and
use the ignition key to remove the lock.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench and the two jack handle
extensions as shown. Insert the hoist end (open end)
of the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects into
the hoist shaft.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle. The wheel wrench has a
hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards
you, to assist in reaching the spare tire.
4. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, you’ll need to
use both jack handle extensions.
5-23
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions
(as needed). Attach the jack handle to the jack. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift
head a little.
5-24
If your vehicle has wheel
nut caps, loosen them by
turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. If you
have a center cap with
wheel nut caps, the wheel
nut caps are designed to
remain with the center cap.
Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry out.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench
to loosen all the
wheel nuts. Turn
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove the
wheel nuts yet.
5-25
2. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire
is on the front of the vehicle (2-Wheel Drive
1500 Series vehicles), position the jack under the
bracket attached to the vehicle’s frame, behind the
flat tire. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle
(all other models), position the jack on the frame
behind the flat tire.
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack
under the rear axle between the spring anchor and
the shock absorber bracket.
If you have added a snow plow to the front of
your vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before
raising the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
5-26
Front Position 2WD 1500 Series
Front Position All Other Models
5-27
Rear Position
3. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear
axle is resting securely between the grooves that are
on the jack head. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit under the wheel well.
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
5-28
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
6. After mounting the
spare, replace the wheel
nuts with the rounded
end of the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand using
the wheel wrench until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
5-29
Front Position 2WD 1500 Series Front Position All Other Models
5-30
Rear Position
7. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
8. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
5-31
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper
torque. See “Capacities and Specifications” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
5-32
Return the bottle jack, wheel blocks, wheel wrench and
jack extensions to their location behind the passenger’s
seat. Secure the items in the vehicle as shown.
A. Wing Nut
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wheel Wrench and
Extensions Retainer
D. Gloves
E. Wheel Wrench
and Extensions
F. Storage Bag
G. Bottle Jack Holder
H. Bottle Jack
I. Wheel Block
Retainer
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. To store the tire, do the following:
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed downward
and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure that the retainer is fully seated
across the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire part of the way upward. When the tire
is almost in the stored position, adjust the tire so that
the valve stem is toward the rear of the vehicle.
5-33
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
F. Flat or Spare Tire
G. Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the
tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire
hoist cannot be overtightened.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and
then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench/hoist shaft to tighten the cable.
Replace the jack, tools and spare tire lock.
5-34
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
5-35
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. If your vehicle
has the Traction Assist System, you should turn it off
by pressing the TAS on/off button. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery
hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be
towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your
vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where
you can continue driving.
5-36
CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others could
be injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.
6- 6-1
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2 Service
6-3 Fuel
6-5 Fuels in Foreign Countries
6-6 Filling Your Tank
6-8 Checking Things Under the Hood
6-13 Noise Control System
6-14 Engine Oil
6-18 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6-20 Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
6-21 Automatic Transmission Fluid
(Except Allison Transmission)
6-25 Automatic Transmission Fluid
(Allison Only)
6-28 Manual Transmission Fluid
6-30 Hydraulic Clutch
6-30 Rear Axle
6-31 Four-Wheel Drive
6-33 Engine Coolant
6-36 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
6-36 Power Steering Fluid
6-38 Windshield Washer Fluid
6-39 Brakes
6-43 Battery
6-43 Bulb Replacement
6-51 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6-52 Tires
6-62 Appearance Care
6-62 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
6-65 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
6-69 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
6-70 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
6-71 Electrical System
6-79 Replacement Bulbs
6-80 Capacities and Specifications
6-2
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see
“Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the
Index before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-3
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet
specifications which were developed by the American
Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and
endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers
Association for better vehicle performance and engine
protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification
could provide improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other gasolines.
6-4
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the fuel pump.
Canada Only
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get
rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or
not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for service.
6-5
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and
fuel system, allowing your emission control system
to function properly. Therefore, you should not have
to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
6-6
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Filling Your
Tank (Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If your vehicle is a chassis
cab, you will have a second fuel cap.
While refueling, hang the filler cap by the tether using
the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise).
6-7
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-9
Hood Release
1. To open the hood, first
pull the handle located
inside the vehicle to
the lower left of the
steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the
secondary hood release, located on the passenger’s
side near the center of the grille.
3. Lift the hood.
4. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.
6-10
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift up the hood on the VORTEC 4300 V6 engine, you’ll see the following:
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped)
F. Fan
G. Engine Oil Fill
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
I. Remote Negative (-)
Terminal (GND)
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(If Equipped)
M. Underhood Electrical Center
N. Battery
O. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-11
When you lift up the hood on the VORTEC 5300 V8 engine (VORTEC 4800 and 6000 V8 engines similar), you will
see the following:
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped)
F. Engine Oil Fill
G. Fan
H. Remote Negative (-)
Terminal (GND)
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(If Equipped)
M. Underhood Electrical Center
N. Battery
O. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-12
When you lift up the hood on the VORTEC 8100 V8 engine you will see the following:
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped)
F. Engine Oil Fill
G. Fan
H. Remote Negative (-)
Terminal (GND)
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(If Equipped)
M. Underhood Electrical Center
N. Battery
O. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-13
Noise Control System
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise
control system warranty is given in your warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
Tampering With Noise Control
System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person,
other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose
of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering
are the acts listed below.
Insulation:
Removal of the noise shields or any
underhood insulation.
Engine:
Removal or rendering engine speed governor
(if equipped) inoperative so as to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
Fan and Drive:
Removal of fan clutch (if equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
Removal of the fan shroud (if equipped).
Air Intake:
Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
Reversing the air cleaner cover.
Exhaust:
Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust
pipe clamps.
6-14
Engine Oil
If the CHECK ENG OIL
LEVEL light appears on the
instrument panel, it means
you need to check your
engine oil level right away.
For more information, see CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL in
the Index.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
All Other Engines 8100 V8 Engine
The engine oil dipstick has a yellow ring handle and
is located on the passenger’s side of the engine.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index
for more information.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the then you’ll need to add at
least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase
capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much
oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area
that shows the proper operating range, your engine
could be damaged.
All Other Engines 8100 V8 Engine
The engine oil fill cap for the VORTEC 4800, 5300 and
6000 V8 engines is located on the driver’s side engine
valve cover. On the 8100 engine, the oil fill cap is
located on the driver’s side engine valve cover. See
“Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-16
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have your oil
changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-17
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is best for
your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s
going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on
an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not
use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-20 F (-29 C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when
to change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage,
but on engine revolutions and engine operating
temperature. When the computer has calculated that
the oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System will
indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between
oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you
drive your vehicle -- usually between 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and 10,000 miles (16 000 km) since your
last oil and filter change. Under severe conditions, the
system may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 10,000 miles
(16 000 km) or 12 months (whichever occurs first)
without an oil change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to
reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light whenever the
oil is changed.
6-18
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Message
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, turn the
ignition key to RUN with the engine off. Fully press
and release the accelerator pedal three times within
five seconds. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message
flashes for five seconds, the system is reset.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.
See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and
disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing
oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of
oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If you have a problem properly disposing of your used
oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The air cleaner assembly
has an indicator that lets
you know when the air
filter is dirty and needs to
be serviced. The indicator
is located on the air
cleaner cover.
See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index to
determine when to check the indicator.
If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is
not completely yellow, no air filter service is required.
When the area inside the indicator is completely yellow,
past the red band, the words “CHANGE FILTER” will
be highlighted. After changing the air filter, press the top
button on the indicator to reset it.
6-19
Your air cleaner is located in the passenger’s side front
corner of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.
1. To remove the air filter, loosen the screws on the
cover. Lift the cover upward. Lift the filter from the
air cleaner housing. Care should be taken to dislodge
as little dirt as possible.
2. Clean the filter sealing surface and the filter housing.
3. Install the new filter.
4. Install the cover and tighten the screws on the air
cleaner cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter. See “Owner Checks and Services”
in the Index.
6-20
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there,
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. The filter is located under the
instrument panel, below the glove compartment.
Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with an
access panel.
To replace the passenger compartment air filter,
do the following:
1. If your vehicle has an access panel, remove the bolts
on it and set the panel aside. If your vehicle does not
have the access panel, skip this step.
2. Next, pull downward
on the filter
retaining bracket.
6-21
3. Remove the air filter by pulling downward on the
element. Remove the second portion of the air filter
by sliding it towards the rear of the vehicle and then
pulling downward.
4. Install the new filter by reversing the steps listed
previously. Be sure to follow any instructions that
may be included in the replacement filter package.
Because this procedure can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have it done at your dealer’s
service department.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to replace the passenger compartment air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance” in the Index.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(Except Allison Transmission)
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90 F (32 C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-22
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90 F (32 C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180 F to 200 F
(82 C to 93 C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50 F (10 C). If it’s colder than 50 F (10 C), drive
the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run
at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50 F (10 C) or more. If it’s colder than 50 F (10 C),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
6-23
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. The red transmission dipstick handle is located at the
rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s
side. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for further information on location. Flip the
handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it
with a clean rag or paper towel.
6-24
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON -III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON -III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-25
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(Allison Only)
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 25,000 miles
(41 500 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90 F (32 C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions,
change the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90 F (32 C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
6-26
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, run the engine
for at least once minute and shift to DRIVE (D).
Then shift to NEUTRAL (N) and then REVERSE (R)
to fill the hydraulic system. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Allow the engine to run at idle (500 - 800 rpm).
Slowly release the brake pedal.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
Cold Check Procedure
The purpose of the cold check is to determine if the
transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until
a hot check can be made. The fluid level rises as fluid
temperature increases. DO NOT fill above the COLD
CHECK band if the transmission fluid is below normal
operating temperatures.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Insert the dipstick into the tube and remove.
Check the fluid level reading. Repeat the check
procedure to verify the reading.
4. If the fluid level is within the COLD CHECK band,
the transmission may be operated until the fluid is
hot enough to perform a hot check. If the fluid level
is not within the COLD CHECK band, add or drain
fluid as necessary to bring the level into the middle
of the COLD CHECK band.
6-27
5. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the
normal operating temperature of 160 F (71 C) to
200 F (93 C) is reached.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Hot Check Procedure
The fluid must be hot to ensure an accurate check.
The fluid level rises as temperature increases.
1. Operate the transmission in DRIVE (D) range until
the normal operating temperature of 160 F (71 C)
to 200 F (93 C) is reached.
2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again. Repeat the check
procedure to verify the reading.
4. Safe operating level is within the HOT RUN band
on the dipstick. The width of the HOT RUN band
represents approximately 1.06 quart (1.0 liter) of
fluid at normal operating temperature.
5. If the fluid level is not within the HOT RUN band,
add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the fluid
level to within the HOT RUN band.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedures described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level.
If inconsistent readings persist, check the transmission
breather to be sure it is clean and unclogged. If readings
are still inconsistent, contact your dealer.
6-28
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON -III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON -III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained,
push the dipstick back in all the way.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil
is changed. See your maintenance schedule to find out
when to change your transmission fluid.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at your GM dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.
6-29
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
5-Speed for VORTEC 4300 V6 and 4800 V8 engines
shown, other manual transmissions similar
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom
of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
6-30
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine how
often you should check the
fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir
and for the proper fluid.
See “Owner Checks
and Services” and
“Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. Additional rear axle
scheduled maintenance is required when trailer towing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for
more information.
6-31
How to Check Lubricant
1500 Series shown, 2500 LD Series similar.
2500 HD and 3500 Series located on rear axle cover.
The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch to
1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the filler plug.
The proper level for the 2500/3500 Series is from
0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm) below the filler plug.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Four-Wheel Drive
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
Manual Transfer Case
6-32
Automatic Transfer Case
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
6-33
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34 F (-37 C).
Give boiling protection up to 265 F (129 C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
6-34
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL coolant.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
6-35
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank
is located on the
passenger’s side of the
engine compartment.
See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index
for more information
on location.
CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is
cold, the coolant level should be at the FILL COLD mark.
If the LOW COOLANT
message comes on and stays
on, it means you’re low on
engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant” in the Index.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand-tight.
6-36
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank.
NOTICE:
Your coolant surge tank pressure cap is a
15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be
tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and
possible engine damage from overheating.
Power Steering Fluid
All Other Engines
6-37
8100 V8 Engine
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system
or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
information on its location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
6-38
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full.
NOTICE:
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
6-39
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
“Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
6-40
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake
system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
6-41
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to
be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
6-42
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent
brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake
pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper
sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse.
The braking performance you’ve come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
6-43
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for battery location.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery from running down.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t
careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealership service department.
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb package.
6-44
Headlamps
1. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin
outward and pull it straight up. To remove the inner
pin, turn it inward and pull it straight up.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
4. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the headlamp lens assembly.
5. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it
clockwise until it is tight. Use care not to touch the
bulb with your fingers or hands.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install and tighten the two pins.
6-45
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Retainer Clip
C. Front Turn Signal Lamp
D. Daytime Running Lamp
1. Remove the headlamp lens assembly as
mentioned previously.
2. Press the retainer clip, located behind the turn
signal housing, towards the outside of the vehicle.
3. Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle.
4. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal
lens housing.
5. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
6. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket. Use care
not to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands.
7. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing
and turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Put the turn signal housing back onto the vehicle
placing the hook and posts on the inner side into the
alignment holes first and then the outer side into the
retainer bracket until you hear a click.
9. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle.
6-46
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
and Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly. A. Cargo Lamps
B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamps
2. Remove the CHMSL bulb holder back plate from
the housing by pressing the release tabs.
3. A CHMSL bulb is removed by pulling the bulb
straight out from the holder back plate. A cargo bulb
is removed by turning the socket counterclockwise
and pulling the bulb straight out.
6-47
4. If a CHMSL bulb is replaced, put the new bulb into
the socket and press it in until it is tight.
5. If a cargo lamp is replaced, put a new cargo lamp
bulb into the socket and press it in until it is tight
before turning the socket counterclockwise.
6. Put the bulb holder back plate into the lamp housing.
7. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
Roof Marker Lamps
1. Remove the two screws
and lift off the lens.
The center roof marker
lamps has six screws
to remove.
6-48
2. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it
from the socket.
3. Put a new bulb into the
socket and turn clockwise
until it locks in place.
4. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
6-49
Pickup Box Identification Lamps
(Dual Rear Wheel Pickup Models)
1. Remove the screws and lamp assembly.
2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness.
3. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the individual lamp
from the lamp housing.
4. Unplug the lamp at the connector.
5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the housing.
6. Reinstall the lamp housing.
Taillamps (Pickup Models)
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate latch
and pull out the
lamp assembly.
A. Stoplamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp
6-50
3. Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it from the
taillamp housing.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten
the screws.
7. Close the tailgate.
Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Stoplamp
C. Back-up Lamp
1. Using your hands, peel the rubber seal away from
the lens.
2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Put a new bulb into the socket and press it in until
it is tight.
5. Reinstall the lens and the lens seal.
6-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index. Here’s how to remove the Shephard’s Hook type.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is facing
away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
6-52
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
6-53
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check
the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-54
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, use the wheel wrench/hoist shaft to tighten
the cable. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools”
in the Index.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels and the tread
design for your front tires is the same as your rear tires,
always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown
here when rotating your tires.
If your vehicle has front tires with different tread designs
(such as all season vs. on/off road) than the rear tires,
don’t rotate your tires front to rear.
6-55
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design
for your front tires is the same as your rear tires, always
use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when
rotating your tires.
If your vehicle has dual
rear wheels and the tread
design for your front tires
is different from your rear
tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here
when rotating your tires.
The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside rear
tires become the outside rear tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you
can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.
6-56
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Dual Tire Operation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque, see
“Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.
If you’re going to be doing a lot of driving on
high-crown roads, you can reduce tire wear by adding
5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressure in the outer tires.
Be sure to return to the recommended pressures when no
longer driving under those conditions. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
CAUTION:
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured. Be sure all
tires (including the spare) are properly inflated.
6-57
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look at the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-59
Temperature -- A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
6-60
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use
the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”
in the Index.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
6-61
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has dual wheels or P265/75R16 or
LT265/75R16 size tires, don’t use tire chains.
They can damage your vehicle because there’s
not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your
vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
If your vehicle does not have dual wheels and is
equipped with a tire size other than P265/75R16
or LT265/75R16, use tire chains only where legal
and only when you must. Use chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the
tires of the rear axle.
Don’t use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
6-62
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and
Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
6-63
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the Multi-Purpose
Interior Cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
6-64
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
See your dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not
be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety
belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
6-65
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or
a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon Ami Powder (non-scratching glass
cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
6-66
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
Your vehicle may have a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that
are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
6-67
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
Cleaning Aluminum or
Chrome-Plated Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
6-68
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment
not made or sold by General Motors are not covered.
6-69
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER SIZE DESCRIPTION USAGE
994954 23 in. x 25 in. Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated Exterior polishing cloth
1050172 16 oz. (0.473 L) Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
1050173 16 oz. (0.473 L) Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
1050174 16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
1050214 32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
1050427 23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
1052918** 8 oz. (0.237 L) Armor All Protectant Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
1052925 16 oz. (0.473 L) Multi-Purpose
Interior Cleaner Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
1052929 16 oz. (0.473 L) Wheel Cleaner Spray on and rinse with water
1052930 8 oz. (0.237 L) Capture Dry Spot Remover Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
12345721 2.5 sq. ft. Synthetic Chamois Shines vehicle without scratching
12345725 12 oz. (0.354 L) Silicone Tire Shine Spray on tire shine
12377964* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
12377966* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
12377984* 16 oz. (0.473 L) Surface Cleaner Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products. * For exterior use only.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. **Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
6-70
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
6-71
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your vehicle and the
damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due
to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
6-72
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access door
is on the driver’s side edge
of the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access
the fuse block.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is
mounted to the fuse block access door. To remove fuses
if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the
fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull
straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block
access door. These can be used to replace a bad fuse.
However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
NAME Usage
L BODY Retained Accessory Power Relay
LOCK Power Door Locks
DRV UNLOCK Power Door Lock Relay
LOCK Power Door Lock Relay
HVAC 1 Climate Control System
6-73
NAME Usage
CRUISE Cruise Control, Instrument
Panel Cluster
IGN 3 Ignition, Power Seats
4WD Four-Wheel Drive System,
Auxiliary Battery
CRANK Starting System
INT PRK Parking Lamps, Sidemarker Lamps,
Interior Lamps
L DOOR Power Door Lock Relay
BRAKE Anti-Lock Brake System
RR WIPER Not Used
ILLUM Interior Lamps
SEAT Power Seat Circuit Breaker
TURN Exterior Lamps, Turn Signals,
Hazard Lamps
UNLOCK Power Door Locks
NAME Usage
HTR A/C Climate Control System
WS WPR Windshield Wipers
IGN 1 Ignition, Instrument Panel
AIR BAG Air Bag
MIR/LOCK Power Mirrors, Power Door Locks
DR LOCK Power Door Locks
PWR WDO Power Window Circuit Breaker
UNLOCK Power Door Lock Relay
IGN 0 PRND321 Display, Odometer, PCM
SEO IGN Special Equipment Option,
Ignition, Manual Selectable Ride
SEO ACCY Special Equipment Option
Accessory, Cellular Telephone
RAP #1 Retained Accessory Power Relay
RDO 1 Audio System
RAP #2 Not Used
6-74
Center Instrument Panel Utility Block
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Name Usage
SEO Special Equipment Option
HTD ST Heated Seats
SPARE 4 Not Used
Name Usage
VANITY Headliner Wiring
TRAILER Trailer Brake Wiring
PWR ST Power Seats
SPARE 5 Not Used
CLUTCH Manual Transmission Clutch Switch
UPF Upfitter
PARK LAMP Parking Lamps (Relay)
FRT PRK EXPT Not Used (Fuse)
SL RIDE Manual Selectable Ride Switch
SPARE 2 Not Used
RR PRK LP Not Used (Relay)
RR FOG LP Not Used (Relay)
SPARE 3 Not Used
INADV PWR Interior Lights Feed
CTSY LP Courtesy Lamps
CEL PHONE Cellular Telephone Wiring
6-75
Underhood Electrical Center
The underhood electrical center is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment near the battery.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Once you remove the cover, you will see some fuses to
the top right of the fuse/relay block. These are spare
fuses and can be used accordingly.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
extractor is located in the underhood electrical center. To
remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the
end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on its location.
6-76
6-77
*1 INJ B--Gasoline Engine and Diesel Engine.
*2 ECM I--Gasoline Engine; ECMRPV--Diesel Engine.
*3 02 A--Gasoline Engine; FUEL HT--Diesel Engine.
*4 02 B--Gasoline Engine; ECM I--Diesel Engine.
Name Usage
GLOW PLUG Diesel Glow Plugs and
Intake Air Heater
CUST FEED Gasoline Accessory Power
STUD #1 Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Feed
ABS Anti-Lock Brakes
IGN A Ignition Switch
AIR A.I.R. System
RAP #1 Retained Accessory Power,
Power Mirrors, Power Door Locks,
Power Seat(s)
IGN B Ignition Switch
RAP #2 Not Used
STUD #2 Accessory Power/Trailer Wiring
Brake Feed
SPARE Spare Fuse
Name Usage
TRL R TRN Right Turn Signal Trailer Wiring
TRL L TRN Left Turn Signal Trailer Wiring
IGN 1 Ignition, Fuel Controls (Relay)
INJ B Ignition, Fuel Controls
STARTER Starter (Relay)
PARK LP Parking Lamps
FRT HVAC Climate Control System
STOP LP Exterior Lamps, Stoplamps
ECM I PCM
ECMRPV Fuel Controls, ECM
CHMSL Center High Mounted Stoplamp
VEH STOP Stoplamps, Cruise Control
TRL B/U Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
INJ A Fuel Controls, Ignition
RR HVAC Not Used
VEH B/U Vehicle Backup Lamps
ENG 1 Engine Controls, Canister Purge,
Fuel System
6-78
Name Usage
ETC Electronic Throttle Control
IGN E A/C Compressor Relay, Rear
Window Defogger, Daytime
Running Lamps, A.I.R. System
B/U LP Backup Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
ATC Automatic Transfer Case
RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger,
Heated Mirrors (Relay)
RR PRK Right Rear Parking Lamps
ECM B PCM
F/PMP Fuel Pump (Relay)
O2 A Oxygen Sensors
FUEL HT Fuel Heater, Glow Plug and
Intake Heater Controls
O2 B Oxygen Sensors
LR PRK Left Rear Parking Lamps
RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger,
Heated Mirrors
Name Usage
HDLP Headlamps (Relay)
TRL PRK Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
RT HDLP Right Headlamps
DRL Daytime Running Lamps (Relay)
HTD MIR Heated Mirrors
LT HDLP Left Headlamps
A/C Air Conditioning
AUX PWR Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlets
SEO 2 Special Equipment Option Power,
Power Seats, Aux Roof Mnt Lamp
SEO 1 Special Equipment Option Power, Aux
Roof Mnt Lamp, Cell Phone, OnStar
DRL Daytime Running Lamps
A/C A/C (Relay)
FOG LP Fog Lamps
FOG LP Fog Lamps (Relay)
RADIO Audio System, Instrument Cluster,
Climate Control System
6-79
Name Usage
CIGAR Cigarette Lighter,
Auxiliary Power Outlets
RT TURN Right Turn Signals
BTSI Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
LT TURN Left Turn Signals
FR PRK Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
W/W PMP Windshield Washer Pump
HORN Horn (Relay)
IGN C Ignition Switch, Fuel Pump,
PRND321 Display, Crank
RDO AMP Not Used
HAZ LP Exterior Lamps, Hazard Lamps
EXP LPS Not Used
HORN Horn
CTSY LP Interior Lamps
RR WPR Not Used
TBC Body Control Module, Remote
Keyless Entry, Headlamps
Replacement Bulbs
Low-Beam Headlamps 2 9006
High-Beam Headlamps 2 9005
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 2 3157KX
Front Marker Lamp 2 194
Front Parking and Turn Lamp 2 3157 A
Rear Marker Lamp,
Taillamp and Stop Lamp 2 3157
Taillamp and Stop Lamp** 2 1157
Rear Turn Lamp 2 3157
Rear Turn Lamp ** 2 1156
Back-up Lamp 2 3157
Back-up Lamp ** 2 1156
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp 2 912
Cargo Lamp 2 912
* For replacement bulbs not listed here, please consult
your dealer.
** Chassis Cab Models
6-80
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information. All capacities
are approximate. When adding see the refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information
and requirements.
Engine Type VIN Code Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC 4300 V6 W 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
VORTEC 4800 V8 V 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
VORTEC 5300 V8 T 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
VORTEC 6000 V8 U 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
VORTEC 6600 V8 1 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
VORTEC 8100 V8 G 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Wheels and Tires
Model Description Torque
C/K 1500 & C/K 2500 6 bolts (14mm) 140 lb-ft (190 N·m)
8 bolts (14mm) 140 lb-ft (190 N·m)
Tire Pressure See the Certification/Tire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door
or the incomplete vehicle document in the cab.
6-81
Cooling System Capacity
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling System” in the Index.
Engine Transmission Quantity
VORTEC 4300 V6 Automatic 12.6 quarts (11.9 L)
VORTEC 4300 V6 Manual 12.9 quarts (12.2 L)
VORTEC 4800 V8 Automatic 13.4 quarts (12.7 L)
VORTEC 4800 V8 Manual 13.7 quarts (13.0 L)
VORTEC 5300 V8 Automatic 13.4 quarts (12.7 L)
VORTEC 5300 V8** Automatic 14.9 quarts (14.1 L)
VORTEC 6000 V8 Automatic 14.8 quarts (14.0 L)
VORTEC 6000 V8* Automatic 14.4 quarts (13.6 L)
VORTEC 6000 V8 Manual 15.2 quarts (14.4 L)
VORTEC 6000 V8* Manual 14.8 quarts (14.0 L)
VORTEC 6600 V8 Manual 20.7 quarts (19.6 L)
VORTEC 6600 V8 Automatic 20.3 quarts (19.2 L)
VORTEC 8100 V8 Manual 21.1 quarts (20.0 L)
VORTEC 8100 V8 Automatic 20.7 quarts (19.6 L)
* Vehicles equipped with the optional engine oil cooler.
** Vehicles equipped with the optional air conditioner.
6-82
Crankcase Capacity
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough
engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine VIN Quantity with Filter
VORTEC 4300 V6 W 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
VORTEC 4800 V8 V 6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
VORTEC 5300 V8 T 6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
VORTEC 6000 V8 U 6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
VORTEC 6600 V8 1 6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
VORTEC 8100 V8 G 6.5 quarts (6.1 L)
Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
Fuel Tank Capacity
Type Quantity
Short Bed 26 U.S. gallons (98 L)
Long Bed 34 U.S. gallons (128 L)
Chassis Cab
(Pickup Box Delete) 34 U.S. gallons (128 L)
Chassis Cab 3500 27 U.S. gallons (102 L) (front)
23 U.S. gallons (87 L) (rear)
Chassis Cab 3500
(California) 24 U.S. gallons (90 L) (front)
23 U.S. gallons (87 L) (rear)
Chassis Cab 3500 27 U.S. gallons (102 L) (front)
Chassis Cab 3500
(California) 27 U.S. gallons (102 L) (front)
Chassis Cab
3500HD 23 U.S. gallons (87 L) (front)
18 U.S. gallons (68 L) (rear)
Chassis Cab
3500HD 23 U.S. gallons (87 L) (front)
6-83
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer’s publications.
VIN Code W V T U G
Oil Filter* PF47 PF59 PF59 PF59 PF454
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter* A1519C A1519C A1519C A1518C A1518C
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter Kit**
52485513 52485513 52485513 52485513 52485513
PCV Valve* CV769C CV948C CV948C CV948C CV948C
Spark Plug 41-932* PTJ14R15***/
PZTR5A15 PTJ14R15***/
PZTR5A15 PTJ16R15***/
PZTR5A15 PTJ16R15***/
PZTR5A15
Fuel Filter* GF626 GF626 GF626 GF626 GF626
Wiper Blades** 15706394 15706394 15706394 15706394 15706394
Wiper Blade Type ITTA ITTA ITTA ITTA ITTA
Wiper Blade Length 22 inches
(56.0 cm)
22 inches
(56.0 cm) 22 inches
(56.0 cm) 22 inches
(56.0 cm) 22 inches
(56.0 cm)
*AC Delco part number
**GM part number
***Denso part number
NGK
A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may
be substituted.
7- 7-1
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2 Introduction
7-4 Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
7-5 Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-18 Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7-23 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
7-25 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
7-28 Part E: Maintenance Record
7-2
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
7-3
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for
you to record and keep track of the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle
for warranty repairs.
7-4
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See “Off-Road Driving With Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index.
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-5
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) and 200,000 miles
(332 000 km) should be performed at the same
intervals after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) and
200,000 miles (332 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C
of this schedule.
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-6
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
the GM Oil Life System (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Reset the system. The system
will show you when to change the oil -- usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 10,000 miles (16 000 km)
since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the
indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 10,000 miles
(16 000 km) or 12 months without an oil and
filter change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you
drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and
filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears. Remember
to reset the Oil Life System when the oil and filter have
been changed. See “Oil Life System” in the Index for
information on resetting.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil and
filter change. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints,
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case
shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, and brake
front axle. Ball joints should not be lubricated unless
their temperature is 10 F (-12 C) or higher, or they
could be damaged.
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-8
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-9
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
Drive axle service. If your vehicle is used to pull a trailer, a rear axle fluid
change is recommended after a break-in period. Change the rear axle fluid
after the first 500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper fluid to use.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-10
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
25,000 Miles (41 500 km)
Allison Transmission Only: Change automatic transmission fluid and filters
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-11
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-12
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
Except Allison Transmission: Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
Except Allison Transmission: If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
Allison Transmission Only: If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic
transmission fluid, change both the fluid and filter.
Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-13
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system as described in the
service manual.
An Emission Control Service.(See footnote .)
Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-14
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Allison Transmission Only: Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-15
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote .)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-16
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR
is over 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90 F (32 C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
Scheduled Maintenance -- Gasoline Engines
7-17
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
Change five-speed manual transmission fluid
(with 4300 V6 or 4800 V8 engines only).
200,000 Miles (332 000 km)
6000 V8 Engine Only: Change five-speed manual transmission fluid.
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL SERVICED BY:
MILEAGE
DATE
7-18
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
Check dual wheel nut torque. For proper torque, see
“Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant
to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the
Index for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in
the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
7-19
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check
of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the
spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try
to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrench/ratchet to tighten the cable. See “Storing the
Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check
Your vehicle has an indicator located on the air cleaner
in the engine compartment that lets you know when the
air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed. Check
indicator at least twice a year or when your engine oil is
changed, whichever occurs first. See “Air Cleaner” in
the Index for more information. Inspect your air cleaner
filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is
used in dusty areas or under off road conditions.
7-20
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See “Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index.
Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system
and repair if needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss
in this system could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired at once.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
tailgate hinge, tailgate linkage, tailgate handle pivot
points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks and folding
seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More
frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to
a corrosive environment.
7-21
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around
the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
7-22
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
With a manual transmission, the key should turn to
LOCK only when you press the key release button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
7-23
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the
body near the exhaust system. Look for broken,
damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as well as
open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions
which could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or
could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the
cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at
least once a year.
7-24
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem;
check and have it repaired, if needed. On manual
shift transfer case, oil the control lever pivot point.
Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper
installation. More frequent lubrication may be required
on off-road use.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and
rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-25
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol of the proper viscosity.
To determine the preferred
viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,
see “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and use only
GM Goodwrench DEX-COOL
or Havoline DEX-COOL
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.
Hydraulic
Brake System Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Windshield
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
Hydraulic
Clutch System Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345347 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
Power Steering
System GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Manual
Transmission
(5-Speed with
Low Gear,
RPO MW3)
GM Goodwrench Synthetic
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12346190 - 1 qt.)
or equivalent SAE 75W-85 GL-4
gear oil.
Manual
Transmission
(5-Speed without
Low Gear,
RPO MG5)
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349
or equivalent).
Manual
Transmission
(6-Speed)
TranSynd Synthetic Automatic
Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12378515).
7-26
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Automatic
Transmission DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Floor Shift
Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Front Axle SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. 1052271
or equivalent).
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261)
or equivalent meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Manual
Transfer Case DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic
Transfer Case AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(GM Part No. 12378508).
Front Axle
Propshaft Spline
or One-Piece
Propshaft Spline
(Two-Wheel
Drive with
Auto. Trans.)
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12345879) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of GM 9985830.
7-27
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Rear Driveline
Center Spline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seat and
Fuel Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points,
Hinges, Latch
Bolt and Linkage
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).
7-28
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-29
Maintenance Record
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-30
Maintenance Record
DATE ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
8- 8-1
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure
8-4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
8-4 Customer Assistance Offices
8-5 GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
8-6 Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
8-7 Canadian Roadside Assistance
8-8 Courtesy Transportation
8-9 Warranty Information
8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
8-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
8-11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-11 Ordering Owner Publications in Canada
8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-3
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should
file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
8-4
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-5
From:
Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
313-381-0022 (Fax Number)
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
0-1-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-6
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2001 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872).
This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone
roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.
If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone,
our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer
recommended service providers. Roadside membership
is free; however some services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs
(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)
8-7
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 2001 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2001 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
8-8
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a
destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
8-9
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
8-11
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Owner Publications
in Canada
Owner’s manuals are available for purchase for all
current and most past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Service manuals may be purchased from Helm
Incorporated using the ordering information on the
following pages. Please note that prices are quoted in
U.S. dollars.
8-12
2001 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2001 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2001 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
8-13
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
Service Manual
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
2001 $120.00
2001 $50.00
2001 $20.00
2001 $15.00
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
U.S. Order Processing $6.00
Canadian Postage
GRAND TOTAL
add 6% sales tax
(See Note Below)
GM-CHE-ORD99 *(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME) (ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY) (ZIP CODE)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
(STATE)
AREA CODE
( )
PCheck or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only —
do not send cash.)
VISA
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
S
ITEM DESCRIPTION NAME YEAR
VEHICLE MODEL QTY. PRICE
EACH* TOTAL
PRICE
2
0
0
1
G
M
H
I
P
T
O
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
MasterCard
Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER

Navigation menu